WO2015109573A1 - 设备通信方法及装置 - Google Patents
设备通信方法及装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2015109573A1 WO2015109573A1 PCT/CN2014/071501 CN2014071501W WO2015109573A1 WO 2015109573 A1 WO2015109573 A1 WO 2015109573A1 CN 2014071501 W CN2014071501 W CN 2014071501W WO 2015109573 A1 WO2015109573 A1 WO 2015109573A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- unlicensed spectrum
- enb
- control signaling
- radio resource
- resource
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 319
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 64
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 754
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 544
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 218
- 238000013468 resource allocation Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 32
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 49
- 230000023402 cell communication Effects 0.000 claims description 40
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 abstract description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 38
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 101150071746 Pbsn gene Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000013475 authorization Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
Definitions
- the present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a device communication method and apparatus. Background technique
- the D2D (Device to Device) communication mode refers to a mode in which the UE (User Equipment) directly communicates with the spectrum resources of the multiplexed cell. Since the UEs can directly communicate with each other, the D2D communication mode can reduce the overhead of control signaling between the base station and the UE, reduce the UE transmit power, improve the utilization of spectrum resources, and improve the capacity of the cellular network.
- the eNB (evolved Node B) allocates radio resources of the licensed spectrum to the first UE and the second UE, respectively, and sends the indication to the first UE and the second UE.
- the measurement configuration of the licensed spectrum is performed, and the first UE and the second UE add the information of the peer acquired in the measurement process and the radio condition to the eNB, and the eNB determines that the wireless condition is suitable for adopting the D2D communication mode. Transmitting, to the first UE, first control signaling for instructing the first UE to send data on the allocated radio resource, and sending, to the second UE, the second UE to receive data on the allocated radio resource.
- the second control signaling the first UE sends data on the radio resource according to the first control signaling, and the second UE receives the data on the radio resource according to the second control signaling, to implement between the first UE and the second UE.
- data transmission The licensed spectrum refers to the spectrum allocated by the frequency regulator to the designated wireless access system for exclusive use.
- the inventors have found that at least the following defects exist in the prior art: Since the licensed spectrum that the eNB can provide is certain, and the demand for spectrum and bandwidth of the service is increasing, the eNB is the D2D communication mode.
- the radio resources allocated by the UE in the UE are difficult to meet the ever-increasing spectrum requirements, resulting in inefficient communication between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode. Summary of the invention
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a device communication method. And equipment.
- the technical solution is as follows:
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a device communication device, which is used in a target device, where the device includes:
- a resource allocation module configured to allocate, by the user equipment UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- a signaling generating module configured to generate control signaling corresponding to the UE according to the first radio resource allocated by the resource allocation module, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource ;
- a signaling sending module configured to send the control signaling generated by the signaling generating module to the UE, so that the UE adopts a device-to-device D2D on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information
- the communication mode implements data transmission.
- the signaling sending module includes: a first sending unit, configured by a second radio resource of an authorized spectrum configured by the evolved base station eNB for the UE Said UE transmitting said control signaling; or
- a second sending unit configured to send the control signaling to the UE by using a third radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum, where the third radio resource is determined by control signaling indication information or pre-configuration, where the control signaling indicates The information is transmitted by the eNB on a second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE.
- the second sending unit includes:
- a first sending subunit configured to send, by using the second radio resource, the control signaling indication information to the UE when the target device is an eNB, and then use the control signaling indication information to determine the Transmitting, by the third radio resource, the control signaling to the UE, so that the UE receives the control signaling on the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information;
- a second sending subunit configured to: when the target device is a primary UE that sends the control signaling, determine that the UE that receives the control signaling is a secondary UE, and receive the eNB on the second wireless resource. Transmitting the control signaling indication information, and sending, by the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information, the control signaling to the secondary UE, so that the secondary UE is in the control signaling Receiving the control signaling on the third radio resource determined by the indication information.
- the device further includes:
- a signal detecting module configured to detect a signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time
- a first communication module configured to: when the signal detected by the signal detecting module is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets a preset condition, instruct the UE to implement data transmission by using the D2D communication mode;
- the UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using a cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to the UE passing The eNB performs data transmission.
- the device further includes:
- a data propagation module configured to send, by the signaling sending module, the control signaling to the UE, to send data to the at least one secondary UE on the first wireless resource by using a broadcast or multicast manner;
- a data sending module configured to send the data to the secondary UE again on the fourth radio resource of the licensed spectrum if there is a secondary UE that does not receive the data that is propagated by the data propagation module.
- the resource allocation module includes:
- a first allocation unit configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE does not have a UE served by another eNB, determine an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, and select the determined unlicensed spectrum. a first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum as the allocated first radio resource;
- a second allocation unit configured to: if the target device is a primary UE, and the slave UE does not have a secondary UE that is served by another eNB, receive an unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, and the unlicensed spectrum resource pool The unlicensed spectrum in an available state is included, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the resource allocation module includes:
- a third allocation unit configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE has at least one UE served by another eNB, perform allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and negotiate the obtained eNB and the a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum shared by other eNBs as the allocated first radio resource;
- a fourth allocation unit configured to: if the target device is a primary UE, and the secondary UE has at least one secondary UE served by another eNB, receive an unlicensed spectrum resource sent by an eNB that provides the service to the primary UE.
- a pool the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is determined to be shared by the eNB after the allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as an allocation.
- the first wireless resource configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE has at least one UE served by another eNB, perform allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and negotiate the obtained
- the resource allocation module includes:
- a fifth allocating unit configured to: for each data transmission adopting the D2D communication mode, dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE; or
- a sixth allocation unit configured to allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to a pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, where the semi-static allocation policy is that each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state An allocation strategy of the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum.
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a device communication device, which is used in a target device, where the device includes:
- a processor configured to allocate, by the user equipment UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- the first radio resource that is allocated to generate control signaling corresponding to the UE, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource;
- a transmitter configured to send the control signaling generated by the processor to the UE, so that the UE implements data by using a device-to-device D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information. transmission.
- the transmitter is specifically configured to send the control signaling to the UE by using a second radio resource of an authorized spectrum configured by the evolved base station eNB for the UE Or transmitting the control signaling to the UE by using a third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum, where the third radio resource is determined by control signaling indication information or a pre-configuration, where the control signaling indication information is that the eNB is The eNB sends the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the UE.
- the processor is specifically configured to: when the target device is an eNB, pass the second wireless Transmitting, by the resource, the control signaling indication information to the UE, and indicating the information by using the control signaling Determining, by the third radio resource, the control signaling to the UE, so that the UE receives the control signaling on the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information;
- the target device is the primary UE that sends the control signaling, and determines that the UE that receives the control signaling is a secondary UE, and receives the control signaling indication information sent by the eNB on the second wireless resource, and then Transmitting, by the control signaling indication information, the third radio resource to the slave UE to send the control signaling, so that the slave UE is configured by using the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information.
- the processor is further configured to detect a signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum satisfies Setting the condition, the UE is instructed to use the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission.
- the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using an eNB.
- the transmitter is further configured to send the After the control signaling, transmitting data to the at least one slave UE on the first radio resource by using a broadcast or multicast manner; if there is a slave UE that does not receive the data, on the fourth radio resource of the licensed spectrum The data is sent to the secondary UE again.
- the processor is specifically configured to determine, if the target device is an eNB, and the UE does not have a UE served by another eNB, And determining, by the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum as the allocated first radio resource; if the target device is a primary UE and the slave An unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB is not present in the UE, and the unlicensed spectrum resource pool includes an unlicensed spectrum in an available state, and the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is to be used in the unlicensed spectrum resource pool.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is selected as the allocated first radio resource.
- the processor is specifically used If the target device is an eNB and the UE has at least one UE served by another eNB, performing an allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and the negotiated eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the non- Authorizing the first radio resource of the spectrum as the allocated first radio resource; if the target device is a primary UE and the slave UE has at least one slave UE served by another eNB, receiving the primary UE An unlicensed spectrum resource pool sent by the serving eNB, where the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is determined to be jointly occupied by the eNB after the allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and is selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool. The first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the processor is specifically configured to dynamically allocate the unlicensed spectrum to the UE for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is allocated to the UE according to a pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, where the semi-static allocation policy is that each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state
- An allocation strategy of the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is specifically configured to dynamically allocate to the UE for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode.
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a device communication method, which is used in a target device, where the method includes:
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is allocated to the user equipment UE, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- control signaling corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource
- the sending the control signaling to the UE includes:
- the third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum Transmitting, by the third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum, the control signaling to the UE, where the third radio resource is determined by control signaling indication information or a pre-configuration, where the control signaling indication information is that the eNB is in the eNB. Transmitted on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured for the UE.
- the sending, by the first radio resource, the control signaling to the UE includes: sending, by the second radio resource, the control signal to the UE when the target device is an eNB And causing the indication information, the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information to send the control signaling to the UE, so that the UE is in the third determined by the control signaling indication information Receiving the control signaling on a radio resource;
- the target device is the primary UE that sends the control signaling
- determining that the UE that receives the control signaling is a secondary UE and receiving, by using the second radio resource, the control signaling indication sent by the eNB Transmitting, by the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information, the control signaling to the secondary UE, so that the third UE determines the third determined by the control signaling indication information.
- the control signaling is received on a radio resource.
- the method further includes:
- the UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using the D2D communication mode
- the UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using a cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using an eNB.
- the target device is a primary UE
- the D2D communication mode is a broadcast or multicast mode
- the sending the control signaling to the UE Also includes:
- the allocating the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the user equipment UE includes:
- the target device is an eNB and there are no UEs served by other eNBs in the UE, determining an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, and determining the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum.
- a radio resource as the allocated first radio resource
- the target device is a primary UE and the secondary UE does not have a service provided by another eNB Receiving, by the UE, an unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, where the unlicensed spectrum resource pool includes an unlicensed spectrum in an available state, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool As the first wireless resource allocated.
- the allocating the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the user equipment UE includes:
- the target device is an eNB, and the UE has at least one UE that is served by another eNB, performing an allocation negotiation with the other eNB, and performing the negotiated non-authorization of the eNB and the other eNB a first radio resource of the spectrum as the allocated first radio resource; if the target device is a primary UE and the slave UE has at least one slave UE served by another eNB, receiving is provided to the primary UE An unlicensed spectrum resource pool sent by the serving eNB, where the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is determined to be jointly occupied by the eNB and the other eNBs, and the non-authorized spectrum resource pool is selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool.
- the first radio resource of the licensed spectrum is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the allocating the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the user equipment UE includes:
- Allocating the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to a pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, where the semi-static allocation policy is the first time for the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state A radio resource allocation strategy.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is allocated to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state; the control signaling corresponding to the UE is generated according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling is carried to indicate the first radio resource
- the indication information is sent to the UE, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may adopt D2D communication on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum in an available state.
- the mode performs data transmission without additionally allocating the radio resources on the licensed spectrum to the UE, and solving the eNB as the D2D communication mode.
- the radio resources allocated by the UE in the formula are difficult to meet the ever-increasing spectrum requirements, resulting in a problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- FIG. 1 is a structural block diagram of a device communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a structural block diagram of a device communication apparatus according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a structural block diagram of a device communication apparatus according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a structural block diagram of a device communication apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for a device communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a method for a device communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a method for a device communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
- the embodiment relates to a device communication method, in which a UE adopting a D2D communication mode transmits data on a radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum.
- the unlicensed spectrum is used by each radio access system, and the radio access system needs to release the radio resources of the unlicensed spectrum after a certain period of time, and restarts the radio resources of the unlicensed spectrum after a certain period of time.
- the wireless access system has the opportunity to compete fairly and use radio resources of unlicensed spectrum.
- the wireless access system refers to a system that accesses the network through a RAT (Radio Access Technology).
- the wireless access system includes a cellular network system, a WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) system, a Bluetooth system, and a Zigbee system.
- Cellular networks include LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (LTE-Advance, Advanced Long Term Evolution), GSM (Global System for Mobile communication), UMTS (Universal Mobile) Telecommunications System, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System, and CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) 2000.
- the device communication method is applied to the LTE-A as an example.
- the Carrier Aggregation (CA) of the LTE-A is performed by a plurality of consecutive or non-contiguous CCs (Component Carriers). Increase user peak data rate and system throughput.
- the aggregated component carrier includes a PCelK Primary Cell, a primary cell, and 0 to 5 SCelK Secondary Cells, a secondary cell.
- the PCell is a cell when the UE performs a random access procedure initial access system or when the handover process is performed to access the target base station.
- PCell also provides security and NAS (Non-Access Stratum) signaling transport.
- SCell mainly provides additional wireless resources for data transmission.
- LTE-A can utilize unlicensed spectrum through CA technology, that is, use unlicensed frequency as SCell.
- FIG. 1 a structural block diagram of a device communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- the device communication device can be used in the target device, including:
- the resource allocation module 110 is configured to allocate, by the UE, a first radio resource of a non-entitled spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum that is used by each radio access system for competition;
- the target device can allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE. For example, if the unlicensed spectrum in the frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz, the target device can select the PRB (Physical Resource Block) in the frequency range of 5170-5175 MHz in 5170-5190 MHz for the D2D communication mode. Data transmission, and then select the PRB of the 5170-5172MHz frequency region as the first radio resource for the UE in the PRB of the 5170-5175MHz frequency region; or, the target device can directly select the 5170-5172MHz frequency region in the 5170-5190MHZ.
- PRB Physical Resource Block
- the PRB is used as the first radio resource for the UE, and the frequency resource used for the D2D communication may also be discontinuous. For different D2D communication UEs, the PRBs of different frequency regions in the 5170-5190 MHz may be selected, which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the target device allocates the first radio resource allocation manner, and does not limit whether the D2D communication uses the uplink resource or the downlink resource of the cell.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB And/or the UE is far away or the power is low, etc., eNB and UE Unlicensed spectrum communication can still be used between the UE or the UE and the UE does not cause serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the signaling generating module 120 is configured to generate, according to the first radio resource allocated by the resource allocation modulo 110 block, control signaling corresponding to the UE, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource;
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated by the UE, the target device needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the time slot refers to a transmission time interval (TTI), that is, a scheduling time unit.
- TTI transmission time interval
- one TTI corresponds to one subframe (frame), and takes 1 ms, including two time slots (slots). ).
- the signaling sending module 130 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the signaling generating module 120, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE After the target device sends the control signaling to the UE, the UE can determine, according to the indication information in the control signaling, in which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received.
- the device communication apparatus allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the device communication device may be used in a target device.
- the embodiment is described by taking an eNB in a cellular network as an example.
- the eNB may be a micro base station or a small base station or a macro base station.
- the device communication device includes: a resource allocation module 110, a signaling generating module 120, and a signaling sending module 130;
- the resource allocation module 110 is configured to allocate a non-grant to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the first radio resource of the weight spectrum, the unlicensed spectrum refers to the spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- the eNB needs to configure carriers for each of the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in a frequency band of the licensed frequency, and the SCell is configured in a frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the UE.
- the eNB After the carrier configuration is completed, the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode can be used for data transmission between at least two UEs. For example, the eNB may send the measurement configuration to the first UE and the second UE respectively, and the measurement configuration may use the same message or a different message as the configuration carrier. Send to the first UE and the second UE. The first UE and the second UE respectively send the measured measurement result to the eNB according to the measurement configuration, and the eNB determines, according to the measurement result, whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode is used for data transmission between the at least two UEs.
- the eNB sends the measurement configuration to the first UE as an example.
- the measurement configuration indicates that the first UE performs spectrum sensing or frequency detection on the unlicensed spectrum where the SCell is located, and the first UE passes the physical layer energy detection (Energy).
- Sensing or Energy Detection or Matched Filter Detection or Co variance Matrix Detection or Cyclostationary Feature Detection or eigenvalue-based spectrum sensing (Eigenvalue Based Spectrum Sensing) ) or RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) or Interference Measurement or SNR (Signal To Noise Rate) or SINR (Signal To Interference Noise Rate) measurement or Techniques such as ROT (Rise Over Thermal) measurement detect the available state of the unlicensed spectrum, and add the detection result to the measurement report and send it to the eNB. The eNB determines whether the unlicensed spectrum is available based on the measurement result.
- the method for performing spectrum sensing or frequency detection on the unlicensed spectrum is the same as that in this embodiment, and will not be described below.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the unlicensed spectrum can still be used between the eNB and the UE or between the UE and the UE without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the measurement configuration may further include a communication identifier, a synchronization identifier, a discovery signal, and the like of the first UE, so that the first UE sends a discovery signal and a communication identifier when receiving the synchronization identifier, and the second UE is receiving.
- RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
- CQI Channel Quality Indication
- the quality indication) or the path loss, etc., the communication identifier of the first UE and other measured data are added to the measurement report and sent to the eNB, where the eNB is clear that the distance between the first UE and the second UE is close and When the signal quality is good, it is determined that the D2D communication mode can be used to transmit data between the first UE and the second UE on the radio resources of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE. For example, if the unlicensed spectrum in the frequency region is 5170-5190MHZ is available, the eNB can select the PRB in the 5170-5175MHz frequency region from 5170-5190MHz for data transmission using the D2D communication mode, and then in the 5170-5175MHZ frequency region.
- the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region is selected as the first radio resource used by the UE in the PRB; or, the eNB may directly select the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region as the first radio resource used by the UE in the 5170-5190 MHz.
- the frequency resources used for D2D communication may also be discontinuous.
- PRBs of different frequency regions in 5170-5190 MHz may be selected.
- a radio resource allocation manner is not limited, and the D2D communication using cell is not limited. of
- the signaling generating module 120 is configured to generate, according to the first radio resource allocated by the resource allocation modulo 110 block, control signaling corresponding to the UE, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource;
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated by the UE, the eNB needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the UE and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the eNB When the data is transmitted in the D2D communication mode, the UE can only perform the receiving operation or the sending operation at the same time. Therefore, the eNB also needs to indicate the operation type of the UE in the control signaling. For example, when the first UE sends data and the second UE receives data, the control signaling corresponding to the first UE is used to indicate that the first UE sends data from a certain frequency region in a certain time slot, corresponding to the second UE. The control signaling is used to indicate that a certain time slot of the second UE receives data from a certain frequency region.
- the first UE Or pre-configuring the first UE to send data in the first type of time slot, the second UE receiving data in the first type of time slot, and the first UE receiving data in the second type of time slot, and the second UE transmitting in the second type of time slot Data, where the first type of time slot and The second type of time slots are different, and they together form all time slots or partial time slots. Then, the first UE and the second UE transmit and receive data according to the pre-configured time slot position, so that the eNB does not need to indicate the operation of the UE through control signaling. Types of.
- the signaling sending module 130 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the signaling generating module 120, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE After the eNB sends the control signaling to the UE, the UE can determine, according to the indication information in the control signaling, in which frequency region from which frequency slot the data is transmitted or received.
- the signaling module 130 includes:
- the first sending unit 131 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE; or
- the eNB may configure the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum to send the control signaling.
- the eNB may pass the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) or the EPDCCH (Enhanced PDCCH, enhanced physical downlink control channel) on the PCell. ) transmitting control signaling to the UE.
- the second radio resource includes, in the time domain, first to second or first to third OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) of the subframe in which the PDCCH is transmitted.
- the control domain location of the symbol can occupy a part of the frequency range of the PCell in the frequency domain, and is determined by factors such as the PDCCH format and resource allocation information of the PDCCH signaling itself.
- the frequency range of the resource is pre-configured by RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling
- the PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel, physical downlink
- the OFDM symbol position of the data sharing area is multiplexed in the frequency domain and the user data on the PDSCH by using FDM (Frequency Division Multiplexing).
- the specific occupied resources are the format and resources of the EPDCCH. Factors such as allocation information are determined.
- the determining and using the second radio resource in the following manner is the same as the determining and using the second radio resource in this embodiment, and details are not described herein below.
- the second sending unit 132 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using a third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum, where the third radio resource is determined by control signaling indication information or a pre-configuration, where the control signaling indication information is that the eNB is the UE in the eNB.
- the configured licensed spectrum is sent on the second radio resource.
- the eNB may also send the UE to the UE by using the third radio resource allocated for the UE when detecting that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state. Corresponding control signaling.
- the eNB in order for the UE to explicitly receive the control signaling from which frequency region, the eNB needs to send control signaling indication information to the UE in advance on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the control signaling indication information. And indicating, in which frequency slot, the UE receives the control signaling from the frequency region; or, the eNB may pre-configure the time slot and the resource that the UE receives the control signaling, and the UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, which time slot is from A frequency region receives control signaling.
- the first radio resource is used to transmit data on the unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used to transmit control signaling on the unlicensed spectrum.
- the third radio resource may be used for the PDCCH or the EPDCCH, and the resource is occupied in the same manner as the second radio resource, except that the third radio resource is located in a part of the frequency range in which the SCell is located.
- the manner of determining and using the third radio resource in the following is the same as the determining and using the third radio resource in this embodiment, and details are not described herein below.
- the second sending unit 132 includes:
- the first sending sub-unit 1321 is configured to: when the target device is an eNB, send control signaling indication information to the UE by using the second radio resource, and send the control signaling to the UE by using the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information,
- the UE is configured to receive control signaling on a third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate, in advance, the third radio resource that sends the control signaling to the at least two UEs on the unlicensed spectrum, and add the indication information for indicating the third radio resource to the control signaling indication information, by using The second radio resource separately sends control signaling indication information to each UE, and then sends control signaling corresponding to the UE to each UE on the third radio resource, and the UE determines to receive according to the received control signaling indication information. Controlling a third radio resource of signaling and receiving control signaling on the determined third radio resource.
- the device further includes:
- a signal detecting module configured to detect a signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time
- the first communications module configured to: when the signal quality detected by the signal detecting module is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets a preset condition, instruct the UE to adopt D2D communication Mode to achieve data transmission;
- the second communication module is configured to: when the signal quality detected by the signal detection module is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to perform data transmission by using a cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using the eNB.
- the eNB may detect the non-predetermined time.
- the signal quality of the licensed spectrum or the predetermined time indicates the UE to detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the eNB determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the eNB determines to use the cell communication mode to transmit.
- Data that is, the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the second UE by using the second radio resource; or the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource.
- the eNB further sends the data to the core network and the application server, and the application server and the core network forward the data to the second UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement data transmission between the UEs.
- the eNB may also detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time.
- the UE is instructed to use the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission; when the signal command whose detection result is the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the UE is instructed to continue to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the duration of the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum being lower than the threshold is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified, and the preset condition is not limited in this embodiment.
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- the first allocating unit 111 is configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE does not have a UE served by another eNB, determine an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, and select the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum.
- the first wireless resource acts as the allocated first wireless resource.
- the eNB may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may determine an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the unlicensed spectrum whose frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; and the eNB selects the first unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum.
- the radio resource is used as the allocated first radio resource. For example, the eNB selects the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region from 5170-5190 MHz as the first radio resource used by the UE.
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- a third allocating unit 113 configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and at least one of the UEs exists by the other The UE that provides the service by the eNB performs the allocation negotiation with the other eNBs, and uses the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum shared by the eNB and the other eNBs as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB as the target device refers to the eNB that provides the PCell and the SCell on the unlicensed spectrum
- the other eNBs refer to other eNBs that use at least the unlicensed spectrum.
- the eNB and other eNBs can be adjacent and provide different cells, for example, the first The eNB and the second eNB; or, the eNB and other eNBs may provide a cell for inter-base station carrier aggregation, such as a primary eNB and a secondary eNB.
- the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resource that can be occupied, and the determined radio resource is used as the first radio resource, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined first radio resource.
- the eNB sends the control signaling to the first UE according to the determined third radio resource, and the other eNB goes to the second according to the determined third radio resource.
- the UE sends control signaling, and the first UE and the second UE use the D2D communication mode for data transmission on the first radio resource after receiving the control signaling.
- the UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode should be in the same DRX (Discontinueous Reception) state, for example, the first UE and the second UE are both in the active time period, and can receive the control signaling. .
- DRX discontinueous Reception
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- a fifth allocating unit 115 configured to dynamically allocate, to the UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode;
- the UE may use the HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request) technology for data transmission, and the eNB may dynamically allocate the first unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs during each new HARQ transmission.
- Wireless resources as described above, are not mentioned here.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum.
- the HARQ feedback is transmitted on.
- PCC's PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
- PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
- the eNB may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs in each HARQ retransmission.
- the allocation manner is as described above, and is not described here; or, the eNB may use the last time in each HARQ retransmission.
- the sixth allocating unit 116 is configured to allocate a first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, where the semi-static allocation policy is the first radio to the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state. Resource allocation strategy.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically allocate each new HARQ transmission.
- the first wireless resource The method for allocating the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the eNB may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each UE by using RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each UE through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only available when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period is only valid when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- At least one UE that uses the D2D communication mode for data transmission exists, at least one UE is served by another eNB, and the eNB dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB allocates the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy.
- the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the time slot in which the eNB and the other eNB respectively use the third radio resource to send the control signaling to the UE is the same, and the frequency may be different.
- a UE transmits data from the first radio resource according to the time slot determined by the control signaling.
- the UE determines that the data transmission is based on the available time of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may respectively send control signaling to the first UE and the second UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the first UE and the second UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode are at the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first wireless resource may be used for data transmission when the first wireless resource is shared.
- the foregoing two transmission modes of the control signaling are not limited in this embodiment.
- the device communication apparatus provided by the embodiment of the present invention allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the ever-increasing spectrum demand leads to the problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- FIG. 3 is a structural diagram of a device communication apparatus according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- the device communication device may be used in the primary UE, and the UE that is not claimed to be the primary UE in the embodiment is the secondary UE, and the primary UE and the secondary UE may be specified by dynamic designation or by a semi-static allocation policy.
- the device communication device includes: a resource allocation module 110, a signaling generating module 120, and a signaling sending module 130;
- the resource allocation module 110 is configured to allocate, by the UE, a first radio resource of a non-entitled spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum that is used by each radio access system for competition;
- the eNB needs to configure a carrier from each of the primary UE and each of the at least one secondary UE. Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in a frequency band of the licensed spectrum, and configure the SCell in a frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- the eNB After the carrier configuration is completed, the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the primary UE and the at least one slave UE can adopt the D2D communication mode for data transmission.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE are used as an example.
- the eNB may send the measurement configuration to the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively.
- the measurement configuration may be sent to the primary UE and the secondary UE by using the same message or a different message.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively send the measured measurement result to the eNB according to the measurement configuration, and the eNB determines, according to the measurement result, whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the primary UE and the secondary UE can adopt the same.
- Data transmission is performed using the D2D communication mode.
- the eNB sends the measurement configuration to the primary UE as an example.
- the measurement configuration indicates that the primary UE performs spectrum sensing or frequency detection on the unlicensed spectrum where the SCell is located, and adds the detection result to the measurement report and sends the detection result to the eNB. .
- the eNB determines whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state based on the measurement result.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the eNB and the UE or the primary UE and the secondary UE can still use the unlicensed spectrum to communicate normally without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the measurement configuration may further include a communication identifier, a synchronization identifier, a discovery signal, and the like of the primary UE, so that the primary UE sends the discovery signal and the communication identifier when receiving the synchronization identifier, and receives the primary identifier when the UE receives the synchronization identifier included in the measurement configuration.
- the discovery signal and the communication identifier sent by the UE and measuring the RSRP or CQI or the path loss according to the synchronization signal and/or the discovery signal, adding the communication identifier of the primary UE and other measured data to the measurement report, and transmitting to the eNB, where the eNB is It is determined that when the distance between the primary UE and the secondary UE is relatively close and the signal quality is good, it is determined that the primary UE and the secondary UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the radio resources of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the primary UE After the primary UE determines that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and the D2D communication mode can be transmitted between the primary UE and the secondary UE, the primary UE can allocate the first wireless resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the secondary UE.
- the signaling generating module 120 is configured to generate, according to the first radio resource allocated by the resource allocation modulo 110 block, control signaling corresponding to the UE, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource; For the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated from the UE, the primary UE needs to acquire the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE and sends the indication information to the secondary UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate from which frequency region from which the UE the UE transmits or receives data.
- the time slot refers to a transmission time interval ⁇ , that is, a scheduling time unit. In LTE, one ⁇ corresponds to one subframe, and takes lms time, including two time slots.
- the primary UE When the data is transmitted in the D2D communication mode, the receiving UE can only perform the receiving operation or the transmitting operation at the same time. Therefore, the primary UE also needs to indicate the operation type of the secondary UE in the control signaling. For example, when the primary UE transmits data and receives data from the UE, the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE is used to indicate that data is received from a certain frequency region from a certain time slot of the UE. Or pre-configuring the primary UE to transmit data in the first type of time slot, receiving data from the UE in the first type of time slot, and receiving the number of the primary UE in the second type of time slot.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE According to the data transmission from the UE in the second type of time slot, where the first type of time slot and the second type of time slot are different, and they together form all time slots or partial time slots, then the primary UE and the secondary UE according to the pre-configured time
- the slot position transmits and receives data without the primary UE indicating the type of operation from the UE through control signaling.
- the signaling sending module 130 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the signaling generating module 120, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the secondary UE After the primary UE sends the control signaling to the secondary UE, the secondary UE can determine from which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received according to the indication information in the control signaling.
- the signaling module 130 includes:
- the first sending unit 131 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE; or
- the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE since the PCell is configured in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE through the PDCCH or EPDCCH or PUCCH on the PCell.
- the second sending unit 132 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using a third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum, where the third radio resource is determined by control signaling indication information or a pre-configuration, where the control signaling indication information is that the eNB is the UE in the eNB.
- the configured licensed spectrum is sent on the second radio resource.
- the primary UE may also perform the third radio resource allocated to the UE when detecting that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the UE transmits control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE.
- the eNB needs to be in advance in the second spectrum of the licensed spectrum.
- the eNB may pre-configure time slots and resources for transmitting control signaling to the primary UE and time slots and resources for receiving control signaling from the UE, and the primary UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, in which frequency region from which frequency region the control signaling is sent. Determining from which frequency zone the frequency zone is from the UE according to the pre-configuration The domain receives control signaling.
- the first radio resource is used to transmit data on the unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used to transmit control signaling on the unlicensed spectrum.
- the second sending unit 132 includes:
- the second sending sub-unit 1322 is configured to: when the target device is the primary UE that sends the control signaling, determine that the UE that receives the control signaling is the secondary UE, and receives the control signaling indication information sent by the eNB on the second wireless resource, and then The third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information sends control signaling to the secondary UE to receive control signaling from the third radio resource determined by the UE in the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate a third radio resource that sends control signaling to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE on the unlicensed spectrum, and add indication information for indicating the third radio resource to the primary UE, respectively.
- the control signaling indication information corresponding to the slave UE the control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE is sent to the primary UE by using the second radio resource, and the slave UE is sent to and from the UE by using the second radio resource.
- the control signaling indication information corresponding to the UE the primary UE sends control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to each of the secondary UEs on the third wireless resource indicated by the control signaling indication information, and each of the secondary UEs receives the control signal according to the received
- the indication information determines a third radio resource that receives control signaling and receives control signaling on the determined third radio resource.
- the device further includes:
- a signal detecting module configured to detect a signal quality of an unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time
- a first communication module configured to: when the signal detection module detects that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets a preset condition, instruct the UE to implement data transmission by using a D2D communication mode;
- the second communication module is configured to: when the signal quality detected by the signal detection module is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to perform data transmission by using a cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using the eNB.
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource, depending not only on whether the unlicensed spectrum resource is in an available state, but also depends on the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum, therefore, in order to avoid unauthorized
- the poor signal quality of the spectrum causes a problem that the communication efficiency between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE is not high.
- the eNB may detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time or indicate the primary UE or the secondary UE every predetermined time. The signal quality of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the primary UE determines to adopt the cell communication.
- the mode transmits data, that is, the primary UE sends the data to the eNB through the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the secondary UE through the second radio resource; Or the primary UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource, and the eNB further sends the data to the core network and the application server, and the application server and the core network forward the data to the secondary UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement the primary UE and at least A data transfer between the UEs.
- the eNB or the primary UE or the secondary UE may also detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time, and the detection result is When the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets the preset condition, the primary UE and the at least one slave UE are used to implement data transmission by using the D2D communication mode; when the signal command whose detection result is the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the primary UE is indicated and at least A slave station continues to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the duration of the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum being lower than the threshold is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified, and the preset condition is not limited in this embodiment.
- the device further includes:
- the data propagation module 140 is configured to: after the signaling module 130 sends the control signaling to the UE, send the data to the at least one slave UE on the first radio resource by using a broadcast or multicast manner;
- the data sending module 150 is configured to send data to the secondary UE again on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum if there is a secondary UE that does not receive the data propagated by the data spreading module 140.
- the master UE may send data to the slave UE on the first wireless resource in a unicast manner to implement data transmission using the D2D communication mode.
- the primary UE may send data to the at least one secondary UE on the first wireless resource in a broadcast or multicast manner, and feedback the received status of the data from the UE. If there is a secondary UE that does not receive data, the primary UE determines that the data cannot be sent to the secondary UE by using the first wireless resource, and then sends data to the secondary UE again by using the fourth wireless resource of the licensed spectrum, where the fourth wireless resource is used. Transfer data on the licensed spectrum. Alternatively, the primary UE may also determine whether the data is received from the UE by detecting the signal quality of the obtained unlicensed spectrum. This embodiment does not limit the manner of determining the secondary UE that does not receive the data.
- the manner in which the primary UE sends data to the secondary UE is determined by the control signaling. For example, if the indication information of the control signaling includes a C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier) or a D2D-RNTI (D2D-Radio Network Temporary Identifier) of a single slave UE And instructing the primary UE to send data to the secondary UE on the first radio resource in a unicast manner; if the indication of the control signaling The information includes the Group Radio Network Temporary Identifier (Group Radio Network Temporary Identifier), which instructs the primary UE to send data to the secondary UE on the first radio resource by means of broadcast or multicast.
- C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
- D2D-Radio Network Temporary Identifier D2D-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
- the eNB may send control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE to the primary UE, and send control signaling indication information corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE in a broadcast or multicast manner, and the primary UE broadcasts or multicasts.
- the mode sends control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE.
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- a second allocation unit 112 configured to: if the target device is a primary UE and does not have a secondary UE served by another eNB, receive an unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, where the unlicensed spectrum resource pool includes the available state.
- the unlicensed spectrum, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the master UE may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to each of the slave UEs.
- the eNB may determine an unlicensed spectrum in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the unlicensed spectrum whose frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; and the eNB determines the unlicensed spectrum resource pool in the unlicensed spectrum in the available state, Allocating the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool to the primary UE, for example, the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is a radio resource with a frequency region of 5170-5175 MHz; the primary UE receives the unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, and determines the unlicensed spectrum.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the primary UE selects the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region from 5170-5175 MHz as the first radio resource used by the UE.
- the frequency resources used for D2D communication may also be discontinuous.
- the primary UE may select PRBs of different frequency regions in 5170-5190 MHz.
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- the fourth allocating unit 114 is configured to: if the target device is the primary UE and there is at least one secondary UE served by the other eNB, receive the unlicensed spectrum resource pool sent by the eNB that provides the service to the primary UE, the unlicensed spectrum
- the resource pool is a first radio resource that is determined to be shared by the eNB after being allocated and negotiated with other eNBs, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB refers to an eNB that provides a PCell and an SCell on the unlicensed spectrum for the primary UE, and
- the eNB refers to other eNBs that use at least the unlicensed spectrum, and the eNB and other eNBs may be adjacent to each other and provide different cells, for example, the first eNB and the second eNB; or, the eNB and other eNBs may provide a cell for inter-base station carrier aggregation.
- the primary eNB and the secondary eNB may be adjacent to each other and provide different cells, for example, the first eNB and the second eNB; or, the eNB and other eNBs may provide a cell for inter-base station carrier aggregation.
- the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resources that can be occupied are determined as the unlicensed spectrum resource pool, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool.
- the eNB allocates the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool to the primary UE, and the primary UE uses the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB allocates the determined pool of unlicensed spectrum resources to the primary UE, and the other eNB allocates the determined pool of unlicensed spectrum resources to the secondary UE.
- the first radio resource is selected from the licensed spectrum resource pool, and the control signaling corresponding to the slave UE is generated according to the first radio resource, and the control signaling is sent to the slave UE, and the first radio resource is received by the UE after receiving the control signaling.
- the data transmission is performed with the primary UE by using the D2D communication mode.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode should be in the same discontinuous reception DRX state, for example, the primary UE and the secondary UE are both active during transmission time.
- the resource allocation module 110 includes:
- a fifth allocating unit 115 configured to dynamically allocate, to the UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode;
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE may use the HARQ technology for data transmission, and the primary UE may dynamically allocate at least one first wireless resource that allocates the unlicensed spectrum from the UE during each new HARQ transmission.
- the method is as described above, and will not be described here.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum.
- the HARQ feedback is transmitted on. For example, feedback is performed using the PUCCH or PUSCH of the PCell or the PUCCH or PUSCH on the SCell, which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the primary UE may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs in each HARQ retransmission.
- the allocation manner is as described above, and is not described here; or, the primary UE may be in each HARQ.
- the first radio resource allocated when the last HARQ retransmission or HARQ new transmission is used in retransmission.
- the sixth allocating unit 116 is configured to allocate a first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, where the semi-static allocation policy is the first radio to the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state. Resource allocation strategy.
- the primary UE may allocate at least one first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy when each unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically transmit new HARQ for each time. Allocate the first wireless resource.
- the allocation manner of the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the primary UE may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each of the secondary UEs through RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each of the secondary UEs through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only performed when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period is only valid when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- the primary UE dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB allocates the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy.
- the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the eNB and the other eNB use the third radio resource to send the control signaling to the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively.
- each of the slave UEs transmits data from the first radio resource according to the time slot determined by the control signaling after receiving the control signaling.
- the data transmission is determined according to the available time of the unlicensed spectrum from the UE.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may separately send control signaling to the primary UE and the secondary UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the primary UE and the secondary UE that use the D2D communication mode to transmit data jointly occupy the first in the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first radio resource can be used for data transmission when the radio resource is used.
- the device communication apparatus allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries an indication for indicating the first radio resource Sending control signaling to the UE, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may adopt a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum in an available state.
- FIG. 4 shows a structural frame diagram of a device communication apparatus according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- the device communication device can be used in a target device, including: a processor 410, a transmitter 420, and a memory 440.
- Processor 410 is coupled to transmitter 420
- transmitter 420 is coupled to memory 430.
- a computer program is stored in the memory 430, and the processor 410 can perform the following operations by accessing the computer program:
- the processor 410 is configured to allocate, to the UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- the radio resource generates control signaling corresponding to the UE, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource;
- the target device can allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE. For example, if the unlicensed spectrum of the frequency region is 5170-5190MHZ is available, the target device can select the PRB of the 5170-5175MHz frequency region in 5170-5190MHZ for data transmission using the D2D communication mode, and then at the frequency of 5170-5175MHZ.
- the PRB of the frequency region of 5170-5172 MHz is selected as the first radio resource used by the UE in the PRB of the area; or the target device can directly select the PRB of the frequency range of 5170-5172 MHz in the 5170-5190 MHz as the first for the UE to use.
- the frequency resource used for the D2D communication may also be discontinuous.
- the PRBs of different frequency regions in the 5170-5190 MHz may be selected. This embodiment does not limit the allocation of the first radio resource by the target device. The method does not limit whether the D2D communication uses the uplink resource or the downlink resource of the cell.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum contains at least two cases, one case where the unlicensed spectrum is empty. Idle state, not occupied by other wireless access systems; one case is that although other wireless access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, but are far away from the eNB and/or UE or have lower power, etc., between the eNB and the UE or UE Unlicensed spectrum communication can still be used with the UE without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the target device In order for the UE to explicitly identify the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated by the UE, the target device needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the time slot refers to a transmission time interval ⁇ , that is, one scheduling time unit. In LTE, one ⁇ corresponds to one subframe, and takes lms time, including two time slots.
- the transmitter 420 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the processor 410, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE After the target device sends the control signaling to the UE, the UE can determine, according to the indication information in the control signaling, in which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received.
- the device communication apparatus allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the device communication device can be used in a target device.
- the target device is an eNB in a cellular network
- the eNB may be a micro base station or a small Base station or macro base station, usually the different types of base stations have different transmit power and coverage.
- the device communication device may include: a processor 410, a transmitter 420, and a memory 440. Transmitter 420 is coupled to processor 410, which is coupled to memory 430.
- a computer program is stored in the memory 430, and the processor 410 can perform the following operations by accessing the computer program:
- the processor 410 is configured to allocate an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- a first radio resource the unlicensed spectrum is a spectrum that is used by each of the radio access systems; and the control signaling corresponding to the UE is generated according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries Indication information of the wireless resource;
- the eNB needs to configure carriers for each of the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in a frequency band of the licensed frequency, and the SCell is configured in a frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the UE. After the carrier configuration is completed, the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode can be used for data transmission between at least two UEs.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the unlicensed spectrum can still be used between the eNB and the UE or between the UE and the UE without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE.
- the eNB needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the UE and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the eNB When the data is transmitted in the D2D communication mode, the UE can only perform the receiving operation or the sending operation at the same time. Therefore, the eNB also needs to indicate the operation type of the UE in the control signaling. For example, when the first UE sends data and the second UE receives data, the control signaling corresponding to the first UE is used to indicate that the first UE sends data from a certain frequency region in a certain time slot, corresponding to the second UE. The control signaling is used to indicate that a certain time slot of the second UE receives data from a certain frequency region.
- the first UE indicates the type of operation of the UE through control signaling.
- the transmitter 420 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the processor 410, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE can confirm according to the indication information in the control signaling. It is determined in which frequency slot from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received.
- the transmitter 420 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE, or send the control signaling to the UE by using the third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the three radio resources are determined by control signaling indication information or pre-configuration, and the control signaling indication information is sent by the eNB on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE.
- the eNB may configure the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum to send the control signaling.
- the eNB since the PCell is configured in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, the eNB may send control signaling to the UE through the PDCCH or EPDCCH on the PCell.
- the eNB may also send the UE to the UE by using the third radio resource allocated for the UE when detecting that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state. Corresponding control signaling.
- the eNB in order for the UE to explicitly receive the control signaling from which frequency region, the eNB needs to send control signaling indication information to the UE in advance on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may pre-configure the time slot and the resource that the UE receives the control signaling, and the UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, which time slot is from A frequency region receives control signaling.
- the first radio resource is used to transmit data on the unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used to transmit control signaling on the unlicensed spectrum.
- the processor 410 is specifically configured to: when the target device is an eNB, send control signaling indication information to the UE by using the second radio resource, and send the control message to the UE by using the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information. So that the UE receives the control signaling on the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate, in advance, the third radio resource that sends the control signaling to the at least two UEs on the unlicensed spectrum, and add the indication information for indicating the third radio resource to the control signaling indication information, by using The second radio resource separately sends control signaling indication information to each UE, and then sends control signaling corresponding to the UE to each UE on the third radio resource, and the UE determines to receive according to the received control signaling indication information. Controlling a third radio resource of signaling and receiving control signaling on the determined third radio resource.
- the processor 410 is further configured to detect a signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets the preset condition, the UE is instructed to implement the data transmission by using the D2D communication mode; If the result of the detection is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, then The UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using a cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to data transmission by the UE through the eNB.
- Whether the UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource depends not only on whether the unlicensed spectrum resource is in an available state but also on the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum, and therefore, in order to avoid poor signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the problem that the communication efficiency between the UEs is not high may be that the eNB may detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time or instruct the UE to detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time.
- the eNB determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the eNB determines to use the cell communication mode to transmit.
- Data that is, the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the second UE by using the second radio resource; or the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource.
- the eNB further sends the data to the core network and the application server, and the application server and the core network forward the data to the second UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement data transmission between the UEs.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the duration of the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum being lower than the threshold is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified, and the preset condition is not limited in this embodiment.
- the processor 410 is specifically configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE does not have a UE served by another eNB, determine an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, and select the determined unlicensed spectrum.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may determine an unlicensed spectrum that is in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the unlicensed spectrum whose frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; and the eNB selects the first unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum.
- the radio resource is used as the allocated first radio resource. For example, the eNB selects the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region from 5170-5190 MHz as the first radio resource used by the UE.
- the processor 410 is specifically configured to: if the target device is an eNB, and the UE has at least one UE served by another eNB, perform an allocation negotiation with another eNB, and use the negotiated eNB and other eNBs to jointly occupy the non- The first radio resource of the licensed spectrum is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB needs to negotiate with the other eNBs when allocating the first radio resources of the unlicensed spectrum. Specifically, the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resource that can be occupied, and the determined radio resource is used as the first radio resource, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined first radio resource.
- the processor 410 is configured to: dynamically allocate, to the UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode; or allocate the non-authorization to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy.
- the first radio resource of the spectrum, the semi-static allocation policy is an allocation strategy for the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the UE may use the HARQ technology to perform data transmission, and the eNB may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs during each new HARQ transmission, where the allocation manner is as described above. Do not repeat them.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum. Transmit HARQ feedback on.
- the PUCCH or the PUSCH of the PCell is used for feedback or the PUCCH or PUSCH on the SCell is used for feedback. This embodiment is not limited.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically allocate each new HARQ transmission.
- the first wireless resource The method for allocating the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the eNB may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each UE by using RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each UE through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only performed when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period only takes effect when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- At least one UE that uses the D2D communication mode for data transmission exists, at least one UE is served by another eNB, and the eNB dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB allocates the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy.
- the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the time slot in which the eNB and the other eNB respectively use the third radio resource to send the control signaling to the UE is the same, and the frequency may be different.
- a UE transmits data from the first radio resource according to the time slot determined by the control signaling.
- the UE determines the data transmission according to the available time of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may respectively send control signaling to the first UE and the second UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the first UE and the second UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode are at the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first wireless resource may be used for data transmission when the first wireless resource is shared.
- the device communication apparatus allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the ever-increasing spectrum demand leads to the problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- the UE when the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission, so that the UE can send data to the eNB when the data cannot be directly sent to other UEs, and the eNB will The received data is forwarded to other UEs, and data transmission between UEs is realized.
- Another embodiment of the present invention provides a device communication device, where the device communication device can be used in a primary UE, and in the embodiment, a UE that is not a primary UE is a secondary UE, and the primary UE and the secondary UE can pass the dynamic Specified or specified by a semi-static allocation policy.
- the device communication device may include: a processor 410, a transmitter 420, and a memory 440. Transmitter 420 is coupled to processor 410, which is coupled to memory 430.
- a computer program is stored in the memory 430, and the processor 410 can perform the following operations by accessing the computer program:
- the processor 410 is configured to allocate an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- a first radio resource the unlicensed spectrum is a spectrum that is used by each of the radio access systems; and the control signaling corresponding to the UE is generated according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries Indication information of the wireless resource;
- the eNB needs to configure a carrier from each of the primary UE and each of the at least one secondary UE. Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in a frequency band of the licensed spectrum, and configure the SCell in a frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE. After the carrier configuration is completed, the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode can be used for data transmission between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the eNB and the UE or the primary UE and the secondary UE can still use the unlicensed spectrum to communicate normally without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the primary UE After the primary UE determines that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and the D2D communication mode can be transmitted between the primary UE and the secondary UE, the primary UE can allocate the first wireless resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the secondary UE.
- the primary UE In order to make the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated from the UE explicitly from the UE, the primary UE needs to acquire the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE, and sends the indication information to the secondary UE. .
- the indication information is used to indicate from which frequency region from which the UE the UE transmits or receives data.
- the receiving UE can only perform the receiving operation or the transmitting operation at the same time. Therefore, the primary UE also needs to indicate the operation type of the secondary UE in the control signaling. For example, when the primary UE sends data and receives data from the UE, the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE is used to indicate that data is received from a certain frequency region from a certain time slot of the UE.
- the transmitter 420 is configured to send, to the UE, control signaling generated by the processor 410, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information.
- the secondary UE can determine from which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received according to the indication information in the control signaling.
- the transmitter 420 is configured to send control signaling to the UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE, or send the control signaling to the UE by using the third radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the three radio resources are determined by control signaling indication information or pre-configuration, and the control signaling indication information is sent by the eNB on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE.
- the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE since the PCell is configured in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE through the PDCCH or EPDCCH or PUCCH on the PCell.
- the primary UE may also perform the third radio resource allocated to the UE when detecting that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the UE transmits control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE.
- the eNB needs to be in advance in the second spectrum of the licensed spectrum.
- the eNB may pre-configure time slots and resources for transmitting control signaling to the primary UE and time slots and resources for receiving control signaling from the UE, and the primary UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, in which frequency region from which frequency region the control signaling is sent.
- the slave UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, which frequency region from which frequency region the control signaling is received.
- the first radio resource is used to transmit data on the unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used to transmit control signaling on the unlicensed spectrum.
- the processor 410 is specifically configured to: when the target device is the primary UE that sends the control signaling, determine that the UE that receives the control signaling is the secondary UE, and receives the control signaling indication information sent by the eNB on the second wireless resource. And transmitting, by the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information, control signaling to the secondary UE, to receive control signaling from the third radio resource determined by the UE in the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate a third radio resource that sends control signaling to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE on the unlicensed spectrum, and add indication information for indicating the third radio resource to the primary UE, respectively.
- the control signaling indication information corresponding to the slave UE the control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE is sent to the primary UE by using the second radio resource, and the slave UE is sent to and from the UE by using the second radio resource.
- Control signaling indication information corresponding to the UE the primary UE is in the control signal And causing, by the third radio resource indicated by the indication information, control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to be sent to each of the secondary UEs, and each of the secondary UEs determines, according to the received control signaling indication information, a third wireless resource that receives the control signaling, And receiving control signaling on the determined third radio resource.
- the processor 410 is further configured to detect a signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum meets the preset condition, the UE is instructed to implement the data transmission by using the D2D communication mode; If the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission.
- the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission through the eNB.
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource, depending not only on whether the unlicensed spectrum resource is in an available state, but also depends on the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum, therefore, in order to avoid unauthorized
- the poor signal quality of the spectrum causes a problem that the communication efficiency between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE is not high.
- the eNB may detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time or indicate the primary UE or the secondary UE every predetermined time. The signal quality of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the primary UE determines to adopt the cell communication.
- the mode transmits the data, that is, the primary UE sends the data to the eNB through the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the secondary UE through the second radio resource; or the primary UE sends the data to the eNB through the second radio resource, where the eNB transmits the data to the eNB.
- the data is further sent to the core network and the application server, and then forwarded by the application server and the core network to the secondary UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement data transmission between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the duration of the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum being lower than the threshold is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified, and the preset condition is not limited in this embodiment.
- the transmitter 420 is further configured to send the control signaling to the UE, and then broadcast or multicast on the first radio resource. At least one of the data is transmitted from the UE; if there is a secondary UE that does not receive the data, the data is transmitted to the secondary UE again on the second wireless resource of the licensed spectrum.
- the master UE may send data to the slave UE on the first radio resource in a unicast manner, and implement data transmission in the D2D communication mode.
- the secondary UE is at least one
- the primary UE may send data to the at least one secondary UE on the first wireless resource by using a broadcast or multicast manner, and feedback the received status of the data from the UE. If there is a slave that has not received the data The UE, the primary UE determines that the data cannot be sent to the secondary UE by using the first radio resource, and sends the data to the secondary UE again by using the fourth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, where the fourth radio resource is used to transmit data on the licensed spectrum. Alternatively, the primary UE may also determine whether the data is received from the UE by detecting the signal quality of the obtained unlicensed spectrum. This embodiment does not limit the manner of determining the secondary UE that does not receive the data.
- the manner in which the primary UE sends data to the secondary UE is determined by control signaling. For example, if the indication information of the control signaling includes a C-RNTI or a D2D-RNTI of the single secondary UE, the primary UE is instructed to send data to the secondary UE on the first wireless resource by using a unicast manner; The information includes the Group RNTI, which instructs the primary UE to send data to the secondary UE on the first wireless resource by means of broadcast or multicast.
- the eNB may send control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE to the primary UE, and send control signaling indication information corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE in a broadcast or multicast manner, and the primary UE broadcasts or multicasts.
- the mode sends control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE.
- the processor 410 is specifically configured to: if the target device is a primary UE, and the secondary UE does not have a service provided by another eNB, receive an unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, where the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is included.
- the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the master UE may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to each of the slave UEs.
- the eNB may determine an unlicensed spectrum in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the unlicensed spectrum whose frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; and the eNB determines the unlicensed spectrum resource pool in the unlicensed spectrum in the available state, Allocating the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool to the primary UE, for example, the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is a radio resource with a frequency region of 5170-5175 MHz; the primary UE receives the unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, and determines the unlicensed spectrum.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the primary UE selects the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region from 5170-5175 MHz as the first radio resource used by the UE.
- the frequency resources used for D2D communication may also be discontinuous.
- the primary UE may select PRBs of different frequency regions in 5170-5190 MHz.
- the processor 410 is configured to: if the target device is a primary UE and there is at least one secondary UE served by another eNB, receive an unlicensed spectrum resource pool sent by the eNB that provides the service to the primary UE, where The unlicensed spectrum resource pool is determined by the eNB to perform the allocation negotiation with other eNBs, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is determined to be commonly occupied. The first wireless resource to be allocated.
- the eNB needs to negotiate with the other eNB when allocating the unlicensed spectrum resource pool. Specifically, the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resources that can be occupied are determined as the unlicensed spectrum resource pool, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool.
- the eNB allocates the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool to the primary UE, and the primary UE uses the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool as the allocated first radio resource.
- the processor 410 is configured to: dynamically allocate, to the UE, the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum for each data transmission using the D2D communication mode; or allocate the non-authorization to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy.
- the first radio resource of the spectrum, the semi-static allocation policy is an allocation strategy for the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE may use the HARQ technology for data transmission, and the primary UE may dynamically allocate at least one first wireless resource that allocates the unlicensed spectrum from the UE during each new HARQ transmission.
- the method is as described above, and will not be described here.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum.
- the HARQ feedback is transmitted on.
- the feedback is performed by using the PUCCH or the PUSCH of the PCell or the feedback of the PUCCH or the PUSCH on the SCell. This embodiment is not limited.
- the primary UE may allocate at least one first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy when each unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically transmit new HARQ for each time. Allocate the first wireless resource.
- the allocation manner of the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the primary UE may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each of the secondary UEs through RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each of the secondary UEs through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only available when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period only takes effect when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- the primary UE dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB.
- the first radio resource is allocated according to the semi-static allocation policy, and the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the eNB and the other eNB each use the third radio resource to send the control message to the primary UE and the secondary UE.
- the time slots in which the time slots are located are the same, and the frequencies may be different, so that each of the slave UEs transmits data from the first radio resource according to the time slot determined by the control signaling after receiving the control signaling.
- the data transmission is determined according to the available time of the unlicensed spectrum from the UE.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may separately send control signaling to the primary UE and the secondary UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the primary UE and the secondary UE that use the D2D communication mode to transmit data jointly occupy the first in the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first radio resource can be used for data transmission when the radio resource is used.
- the device communication apparatus allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to the UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the ever-increasing spectrum demand leads to the problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- the UE when the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission, so that the UE can send data to the eNB when the data cannot be directly sent to other UEs, and the eNB will The received data is forwarded to other UEs, and data transmission between UEs is realized.
- FIG. 5 a flow chart of a method for device communication according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- the device communication method can be used in the target device, including:
- Step 501 When the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, allocate the first unlicensed spectrum to the UE. Radio resources, the unlicensed spectrum refers to the spectrum used by each wireless access system for competition;
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the unlicensed spectrum can still be used between the eNB and the UE or between the UE and the UE without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the target device can allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE. For example, if the unlicensed spectrum of the frequency region is 5170-5190MHZ is available, the target device can select the PRB of the 5170-5175MHz frequency region in 5170-5190MHZ for data transmission using the D2D communication mode, and then at the frequency of 5170-5175MHZ.
- the PRB of the frequency region of 5170-5172 MHz is selected as the first radio resource used by the UE in the PRB of the area; or the target device can directly select the PRB of the frequency range of 5170-5172 MHz in the 5170-5190 MHz as the first for the UE to use.
- the frequency resource used for the D2D communication may also be discontinuous.
- the PRBs of different frequency regions in the 5170-5190 MHz may be selected. This embodiment does not limit the allocation of the first radio resource by the target device. The method does not limit whether the D2D communication uses the uplink resource or the downlink resource of the cell.
- Step 502 Generate control signaling corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource.
- the target device In order for the UE to explicitly identify the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated by the UE, the target device needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the time slot refers to a transmission time interval ⁇ , that is, one scheduling time unit.
- one TTI corresponds to one subframe, and takes lms time, including two time slots.
- Step 503 Send control signaling to the UE, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE After the target device sends the control signaling to the UE, the UE can determine, according to the indication information in the control signaling, in which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received.
- the device communication method allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to a UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE is on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information.
- the data transmission is implemented by using the D2D communication mode, and the data transmission can be performed by using the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum in the available state, without additionally allocating the radio resources on the licensed spectrum to the UE, and solving the eNB as the D2D.
- the radio resources allocated by the UE in the communication mode are difficult to meet the ever-increasing spectrum requirements, resulting in a problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- FIG. 6 a flowchart of a method for a device communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- the device communication method can be used in the target device.
- the target device is an eNB in the cellular network, and the eNB may be a micro base station or a small base station or a macro base station.
- the different types of base stations transmit power and Coverage is different.
- Device communication methods including:
- Step 601 When the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, allocate, to the UE, a first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- the eNB needs to configure carriers for each of the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in a frequency band of the licensed frequency, and the SCell is configured in a frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the UE. After the carrier configuration is completed, the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode can be used for data transmission between at least two UEs. For example, the eNB may send the measurement configuration to the first UE and the second UE respectively, and the measurement configuration may use the same message or a different message as the configuration carrier. Send to the first UE and the second UE.
- the first UE and the second UE respectively send the measured measurement result to the eNB according to the measurement configuration, and the eNB determines, according to the measurement result, whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the D2D communication mode is used for data transmission between the at least two UEs.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the target device is an eNB and there is no UE served by the other eNB in the UE, determining the unlicensed spectrum in the available state, and using the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the determined unlicensed spectrum as the allocated The first wireless resource.
- the eNB may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs. Specifically, the eNB may determine an unlicensed spectrum resource that is in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the frequency region is The unlicensed spectrum of 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; the eNB uses the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the determined unlicensed spectrum as the allocated first radio resource, for example, the eNB selects 5170 in 5170-5190 MHz. The PRB of the -5172 MHz frequency region serves as the first radio resource for the UE to use.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the allocation negotiation is performed with the other eNB, and the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum shared by the negotiated eNB and the other eNBs is used as the allocated A wireless resource.
- the eNB as the target device refers to the eNB that provides the PCell and the SCell on the unlicensed spectrum
- the other eNBs refer to other eNBs that use at least the unlicensed spectrum.
- the eNB and other eNBs can be adjacent and provide different cells, for example, the first The eNB and the second eNB; or, the eNB and other eNBs may provide a cell for inter-base station carrier aggregation, such as a primary eNB and a secondary eNB.
- the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resource that can be occupied, and the determined radio resource is used as the first radio resource, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined first radio resource.
- the eNB sends the control signaling to the first UE according to the determined third radio resource, and the other eNB goes to the second according to the determined third radio resource.
- the UE sends control signaling, and the first UE and the second UE use the D2D communication mode for data transmission on the first radio resource after receiving the control signaling.
- the UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode should be in the same discontinuous reception DRX state, for example, the first UE and the second UE are both in the active time period to receive the control signaling.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is allocated to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, and the semi-static allocation policy is an allocation strategy for the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the UE may use the HARQ technology to perform data transmission, and the eNB may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs during each new HARQ transmission, where the allocation manner is as described above. Do not repeat them.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum. Transmit HARQ feedback on.
- the feedback is performed by using the PUCCH or the PUSCH of the PCell or the PUCCH or the PUSCH on the SCell. This embodiment is not limited.
- the eNB may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs in each HARQ retransmission.
- the allocation manner is as described above, and is not described here; or, the eNB may use the last time in each HARQ retransmission.
- the eNB may allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy each time the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically allocate each new HARQ transmission.
- the first wireless resource The method for allocating the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the eNB may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each UE by using RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each UE through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only performed when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period only takes effect when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- Step 602 Generate control signaling corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource.
- the eNB In order to make the UE clear the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated by the UE, the eNB needs to obtain the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the UE and sends the indication information to the UE.
- the indication information is used to indicate to which frequency region the UE transmits or receives data from which time slot.
- the eNB When the data is transmitted in the D2D communication mode, the UE can only perform the receiving operation or the sending operation at the same time. Therefore, the eNB also needs to indicate the operation type of the UE in the control signaling. For example, when the first UE sends data and the second UE receives data, the control signaling corresponding to the first UE is used to indicate that the first UE sends data from a certain frequency region in a certain time slot, corresponding to the second UE. The control signaling is used to indicate that a certain time slot of the second UE receives data from a certain frequency region.
- Step 603 Send control signaling to the UE, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the UE After the eNB sends the control signaling to the UE, the UE can determine, according to the indication information in the control signaling, in which frequency region from which frequency slot the data is transmitted or received.
- the sending the control signaling to the UE includes:
- the configuration determines that the control signaling indication information is sent by the eNB on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE.
- the eNB may configure the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum to send the control signaling.
- the eNB since the PCell is configured in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, the eNB may send control signaling to the UE through the PDCCH or EPDCCH on the PCell.
- the eNB may also send the UE to the UE by using the third radio resource allocated for the UE when detecting that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state. Corresponding control signaling.
- the eNB in order for the UE to explicitly receive the control signaling from which frequency region, the eNB needs to send control signaling indication information to the UE in advance on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may pre-configure the time slot and the resource that the UE receives the control signaling, and the UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, which time slot is from A frequency region receives control signaling.
- the first radio resource is used to transmit data on the unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used to transmit control signaling on the unlicensed spectrum.
- sending control signaling to the UE by using the first radio resource includes:
- the control signaling indication information is sent to the UE by using the second radio resource, and the third radio resource determined by the control signaling indication information sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE determines the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate transmission control signaling to at least two UEs on the unlicensed spectrum in advance.
- the third radio resource, and the indication information for indicating the third radio resource is added to the control signaling indication information, and the control signaling indication information is sent to each UE by using the second radio resource, and then the third wireless Transmitting, by the UE, control signaling corresponding to the UE to each UE, and determining, by the UE, the third radio resource that receives the control signaling according to the received control signaling indication information, and receiving the control signal on the determined third radio resource. make.
- the UE is instructed to implement the data transmission by using the D2D communication mode;
- the UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using the cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using the eNB.
- Whether the UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource depends not only on whether the unlicensed spectrum resource is in an available state but also on the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum, and therefore, in order to avoid poor signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the problem that the communication efficiency between the UEs is not high may be that the eNB may detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time or instruct the UE to detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time.
- the eNB determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the eNB determines to use the cell communication mode to transmit.
- Data that is, the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the second UE by using the second radio resource; or the first UE sends the data to the eNB by using the second radio resource.
- the eNB further sends the data to the core network and the application server, and the application server and the core network forward the data to the second UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement data transmission between the UEs.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the duration of the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum being lower than the threshold is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified. This embodiment does not limit the preset condition.
- At least one UE that uses the D2D communication mode for data transmission exists, at least one UE is served by another eNB, and the eNB dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB allocates the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy.
- the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the time slot in which the eNB and the other eNB respectively use the third radio resource to send the control signaling to the UE is the same, and the frequency may be different.
- One UE is at After receiving the control signaling, the time slot determined according to the control signaling transmits data from the first wireless resource.
- the UE determines the data transmission according to the available time of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may respectively send control signaling to the first UE and the second UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the first UE and the second UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode are at the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first wireless resource may be used for data transmission when the first wireless resource is shared.
- the device communication method allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to a UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the ever-increasing spectrum demand leads to the problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- the UE when the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission, so that the UE can send data to the eNB when the data cannot be directly sent to other UEs, and the eNB will The received data is forwarded to other UEs, and data transmission between UEs is realized.
- FIG. 7 a flow chart of a method for device communication according to another embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- the device communication method can be used in the primary UE, and the UE that is not claimed to be the primary UE in the embodiment is the secondary UE, and the primary UE and the secondary UE can be specified by dynamic designation or by a semi-static allocation policy.
- Device communication methods include:
- Step 701 When the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, allocate, to the UE, a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum, where the unlicensed spectrum refers to a spectrum used by each radio access system for competition;
- the eNB needs to separately obtain the UE from the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- Configure the carrier Specifically, the eNB may configure the PCell in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, and configure the SCell in the frequency band of the unlicensed spectrum, and send the carrier configuration information of each cell to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- the eNB needs to determine whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the primary UE and the at least one slave UE can adopt the D2D communication mode for data transmission.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE are used as an example.
- the eNB may send the measurement configuration to the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively.
- the measurement configuration may be sent to the primary UE and the secondary UE by using the same message or a different message.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively send the measured measurement results to the eNB according to the measurement configuration, and the eNB determines, according to the measurement result, whether the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and whether the primary UE and the secondary UE can use the D2D communication mode for data transmission.
- the available state of the unlicensed spectrum includes at least two cases.
- One case is that the unlicensed spectrum is in an idle state and is not occupied by other radio access systems.
- One case is that although other radio access systems occupy unlicensed frequency bands, the distance eNB If the UE is far away or the power is low, the eNB and the UE or the primary UE and the secondary UE can still use the unlicensed spectrum to communicate normally without causing serious interference to other wireless access systems.
- the primary UE After the primary UE determines that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and the D2D communication mode can be transmitted between the primary UE and the secondary UE, the primary UE can allocate the first wireless resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the secondary UE.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the target device is the primary UE and there is no secondary UE served by the other eNB from the UE, the unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB is received, and the unlicensed spectrum resource pool includes the unlicensed spectrum in the available state, and the unlicensed spectrum will be unauthorized.
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the primary UE may directly allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to each of the slave UEs.
- the eNB may determine the unlicensed spectrum resource in an available state, for example, the eNB determines that the unlicensed spectrum whose frequency region is 5170-5190 MHz is in an available state; and the eNB determines the unlicensed spectrum resource pool in the unlicensed spectrum that is in the available state.
- the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is allocated to the primary UE, for example, the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is a radio resource with a frequency region of 5170-5175 MHz; the primary UE receives the unlicensed spectrum resource pool allocated by the eNB, and the determined non-authorized
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected in the spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the primary UE selects the PRB of the 5170-5172 MHz frequency region from 5170-5175 MHz as the first radio resource used by the UE. .
- the frequency resources used for D2D communication can also be discontinuous for different D2D
- the primary UE of the communication can select PRBs of different frequency regions in 5170-5190 MHz.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the target device is the primary UE and there is at least one secondary UE served by the other eNB
- the unlicensed spectrum resource pool sent by the eNB that provides the service to the primary UE is received, and the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is performed by the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first radio resource that is commonly occupied and the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool is used as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB refers to the eNB that provides the PCell and the SCell on the unlicensed spectrum for the primary UE.
- the other eNBs refer to other eNBs that use at least the unlicensed spectrum.
- the eNB and other eNBs can be adjacent and provide different cells, for example, the first eNB and the first eNB.
- the two eNBs; or, the eNB and other eNBs may provide cells for carrier aggregation between the base stations, for example, a primary eNB and a secondary eNB.
- the eNB adds the information of the radio resource that can be occupied by the eNB to the negotiation information through an interface between the base stations, such as the X2 interface, and sends the information to the other eNB, and the other eNB determines the other eNB in the radio resource indicated by the negotiation information.
- the radio resources that can be occupied are determined as the unlicensed spectrum resource pool, and the other eNBs notify the eNB of the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool.
- the eNB allocates the determined unlicensed spectrum resource pool to the primary UE, and the primary UE uses the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum selected from the unlicensed spectrum resource pool as the allocated first radio resource.
- the eNB allocates the determined pool of unlicensed spectrum resources to the primary UE, and the other eNB allocates the determined pool of unlicensed spectrum resources to the secondary UE.
- the first radio resource is selected from the licensed spectrum resource pool, and the control signaling corresponding to the slave UE is generated according to the first radio resource, and the control signaling is sent to the slave UE, and the first radio resource is received by the UE after receiving the control signaling.
- the data transmission is performed with the primary UE by using the D2D communication mode.
- the primary UE and the secondary UE transmitting data in the D2D communication mode should be in the same discontinuous reception DRX state, for example, the primary UE and the secondary UE are both active during transmission time.
- the UE allocates the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE, including:
- the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum is allocated to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy, and the semi-static allocation policy is the first non-authorized spectrum when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state.
- the allocation strategy of line resources is the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum.
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE may use the HARQ technology for data transmission, and the primary UE may dynamically allocate at least one first wireless resource that allocates the unlicensed spectrum from the UE during each new HARQ transmission.
- the method is as described above, and will not be described here.
- the HARQ feedback for the data may be fed back through the fifth radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum or the sixth radio resource of the licensed spectrum, the fifth radio resource is used for transmitting HARQ feedback on the unlicensed spectrum, and the sixth radio resource is used for the licensed spectrum.
- the HARQ feedback is transmitted on.
- the feedback is performed by using the PUCCH or the PUSCH of the PCell or the feedback of the PUCCH or the PUSCH on the SCell. This embodiment is not limited.
- the primary UE may dynamically allocate the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the at least two UEs during each HARQ retransmission, as described above, and is not described herein; or, the primary UE may use in each HARQ retransmission.
- the primary UE may allocate at least one first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum to the UE according to the pre-configured semi-static allocation policy when each unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and does not need to dynamically transmit new HARQ for each time. Allocate the first wireless resource.
- the allocation manner of the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy is as described above, and details are not described herein.
- the primary UE may separately configure a period of the first radio resource for each of the secondary UEs through RRC signaling, and then send a semi-static allocation policy to each of the secondary UEs through the PDCCH or the EPDCCH. Since the data transmission on the SCell is only available when the unlicensed spectrum is available, the period only takes effect when the unlicensed spectrum is available.
- Step 702 Generate control signaling corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource, where the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource.
- the primary UE In order to make the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum allocated from the UE explicitly from the UE, the primary UE needs to acquire the indication information of the first radio resource, and adds the indication information to the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE, and sends the indication information to the secondary UE. .
- the indication information is used to indicate from which frequency region from which the UE the UE transmits or receives data.
- the time slot refers to a transmission time interval ⁇ , that is, a scheduling time unit. In LTE, one ⁇ corresponds to one subframe, and takes lms time, including two time slots.
- the receiving UE can only perform the receiving operation or the transmitting operation at the same time. Therefore, the primary UE also needs to indicate the operation type of the secondary UE in the control signaling. For example, when the primary UE transmits data and receives data from the UE, the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE is used to indicate that data is received from a certain frequency region from a certain time slot of the UE.
- the slot transmits data, the UE receives data in the first type of time slot, and the primary UE receives data in the second type of time slot, and the UE transmits data in the second type of time slot, where the first type of time slot and the second type of time slot Differently, they together form all time slots or partial time slots, and then the primary UE and the secondary UE transmit and receive data according to the pre-configured time slot positions, without the primary UE indicating the type of operation from the UE through control signaling.
- Step 703 Send control signaling to the UE, so that the UE implements data transmission by using a D2D communication mode on the first wireless resource determined according to the indication information.
- the secondary UE After the primary UE sends the control signaling to the secondary UE, the secondary UE can determine from which frequency region from which frequency region the data is transmitted or received according to the indication information in the control signaling.
- the sending the control signaling to the UE includes:
- the configuration determines that the control signaling indication information is sent by the eNB on the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum configured by the eNB for the UE.
- the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE by using the second radio resource of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE since the PCell is configured in the frequency band of the licensed spectrum, the primary UE may send control signaling to the secondary UE through the PDCCH or EPDCCH or PUCCH on the PCell.
- the primary UE may also detect that the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state and no other wireless access system is occupying the unlicensed spectrum.
- the control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE is transmitted to the secondary UE for the third wireless resource allocated from the UE.
- the eNB needs to pre-empt the second in the licensed spectrum.
- the eNB may pre-configure time slots and resources for transmitting control signaling to the primary UE and time slots and resources for receiving control signaling from the UE, and the primary UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, in which frequency region from which frequency region the control signaling is sent.
- the slave UE determines, according to the pre-configuration, which frequency region from which frequency region the control signaling is received.
- the first radio resource is used for transmitting data on an unlicensed spectrum
- the third radio resource is used for non-granting Control signaling is transmitted on the weight spectrum.
- sending control signaling to the UE by using the first radio resource includes:
- the target device is the primary UE that sends the control signaling
- the three radio resources send control signaling to the secondary UE to receive control signaling from the third radio resource determined by the UE in the control signaling indication information.
- the eNB may allocate a third radio resource that sends control signaling to the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE on the unlicensed spectrum, and add indication information for indicating the third radio resource to the primary UE, respectively.
- the control signaling indication information corresponding to the slave UE the control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE is sent to the primary UE by using the second radio resource, and the slave UE is sent to and from the UE by using the second radio resource.
- the control signaling indication information corresponding to the UE the primary UE sends control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to each of the secondary UEs on the third wireless resource indicated by the control signaling indication information, and each of the secondary UEs receives the control signal according to the received
- the indication information determines a third radio resource that receives control signaling and receives control signaling on the determined third radio resource.
- Step 704 If the target device is the primary UE and the D2D communication mode is the broadcast or multicast mode, send data to the at least one secondary UE on the first wireless resource by using a broadcast or multicast mode; if there is a secondary UE that does not receive the data. And transmitting the data to the secondary UE again on the fourth radio resource of the licensed spectrum.
- the master UE may send data to the slave UE on the first wireless resource in a unicast manner to implement data transmission using the D2D communication mode.
- the primary UE may send data to the at least one secondary UE on the first wireless resource in a broadcast or multicast manner, and feedback the received status of the data from the UE. If there is a secondary UE that does not receive data, the primary UE determines that data cannot be transmitted to the secondary UE through the first wireless resource, and then sends data to the secondary UE again by the second wireless resource that grants the spectrum.
- the primary UE may also determine whether the data is received from the UE by detecting the signal quality of the obtained unlicensed spectrum. This embodiment does not limit the manner of determining the secondary UE that does not receive the data.
- the manner in which the primary UE sends data to the secondary UE is determined by the control signaling. For example, if the indication information of the control signaling includes a C-RNTI or a D2D-RNTI of the single secondary UE, the primary UE is instructed to send data to the secondary UE on the first wireless resource by using a unicast manner; The information includes the Group RNTI, which instructs the primary UE to send data to the secondary UE on the first wireless resource by means of broadcast or multicast.
- the eNB may send control signaling indication information corresponding to the primary UE to the primary UE, and send control signaling indication information corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE in a broadcast or multicast manner, and the primary UE broadcasts or multicasts.
- the mode sends control signaling corresponding to the secondary UE to the at least one secondary UE.
- the UE is instructed to implement the data transmission by using the D2D communication mode;
- the UE is instructed to implement data transmission by using the cell communication mode, where the cell communication mode refers to that the UE performs data transmission by using the eNB.
- the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE can transmit data in the D2D communication mode on the first radio resource, depending not only on whether the unlicensed spectrum resource is in an available state, but also depends on the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum, therefore, in order to avoid unauthorized
- the poor signal quality of the spectrum causes a problem that the communication efficiency between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE is not high.
- the eNB may detect the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum every predetermined time or indicate the primary UE or the secondary UE every predetermined time. The signal quality of the licensed spectrum.
- the primary UE determines to continue to use the D2D communication mode to transmit data; if the detection result is that the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not satisfy the preset condition, the primary UE determines to adopt the cell communication.
- the mode transmits the data, that is, the primary UE sends the data to the eNB through the second radio resource, and the eNB forwards the received data to the secondary UE through the second radio resource; or the primary UE sends the data to the eNB through the second radio resource, where the eNB transmits the data to the eNB.
- the data is further sent to the core network and the application server, and then forwarded by the application server and the core network to the secondary UE through the eNB or other eNB to implement data transmission between the primary UE and the at least one secondary UE.
- the preset condition may include: the unavailable duration of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the wireless condition of the unlicensed spectrum is less than or equal to at least one of the second threshold.
- the preset condition can also be modified. This embodiment does not limit the preset condition.
- the primary UE dynamically allocates the first radio resource or the eNB allocates the first radio resource according to the semi-static allocation policy.
- the control signaling needs to be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, and the eNB and the other eNB use the third radio resource to send the control signaling to the primary UE and the secondary UE respectively.
- each of the slave UEs transmits data from the first radio resource according to the time slot determined by the control signaling after receiving the control signaling.
- the data transmission is determined according to the available time of the unlicensed spectrum from the UE.
- the control signaling may be sent when the eNB and the other eNBs jointly occupy the first radio resource, or may not be sent when the eNB and the other eNB jointly occupy the first radio resource.
- the eNB and other eNBs may separately send control signaling to the primary UE and the secondary UE in the same subframe position of different radio frames, so that the primary UE and the secondary UE that use the D2D communication mode to transmit data jointly occupy the first in the eNB and other eNBs.
- the first radio resource can be used for data transmission when the radio resource is used.
- the device communication method allocates a first radio resource of an unlicensed spectrum to a UE when the unlicensed spectrum is in an available state, and generates a control corresponding to the UE according to the allocated first radio resource.
- the control signaling carries indication information for indicating the first radio resource, and sends control signaling to the UE, so that the UE uses the D2D communication mode to implement data transmission on the first radio resource determined according to the indication information, and may be in the
- the D2D communication mode is used for the data transmission on the first radio resource of the unlicensed spectrum of the available state, and the radio resource allocated on the licensed spectrum is not required to be allocated to the UE, which solves the problem that the radio resource allocated by the eNB for the UE in the D2D communication mode is difficult to meet.
- the ever-increasing spectrum demand leads to the problem that the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is not high, and the communication efficiency between UEs adopting the D2D communication mode is improved.
- the UE when the signal quality of the unlicensed spectrum does not meet the preset condition, the UE is instructed to use the cell communication mode to implement data transmission, so that the UE can send data to the eNB when the data cannot be directly sent to other UEs, and the eNB will The received data is forwarded to other UEs, and data transmission between UEs is realized.
- the device communication device provided by the foregoing embodiment performs device communication, only the division of the above functional modules is illustrated. In actual applications, the function distribution may be completed by different functional modules as needed. The internal structure of the device communication device is divided into different functional modules to perform all or part of the functions described above.
- the device communication device and the device communication method embodiment provided by the foregoing embodiments are in the same concept, and the specific implementation process is described in the method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
- the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the unit may be only a logical function division.
- there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined. Either can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed.
- the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be electrical, mechanical or otherwise.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as the units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solution of the embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present invention which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including
- the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
- the foregoing storage medium includes: a USB flash drive, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program code. .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
本发明公开了一种设备通信方法及装置,涉及通信领域,所述装置包括:资源分配模块、信令生成模块和信令发送模块。所述方法,包括:在非授权频谱处于可用状态时,为用户设备UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源,非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竞争使用的频谱;根据分配的第一无线资源生成与UE对应的控制信令,控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息;向UE发送控制信令,以便UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用设备到设备D2D通信模式实现数据传输。本发明解决了eNB为D2D通信模式中的UE分配的无线资源难以满足不断增长的频谱需求的问题,达到了提高采用D2D通信模式的UE之间的通信效率的效果。
Description
设备通信方法及装置
技术领域
本发明涉及通信领域, 特别涉及一种设备通信方法及装置。 背景技术
D2D ( Device to Device, 设备到设备 )通信模式是指 UE ( User Equipment, 用户设备)之间通过复用小区的频谱资源进行直接通信的模式。 由于 UE之间 可以直接通信, 因此, D2D通信模式可以降低基站与 UE之间的控制信令的开 销、 降低 UE发射功率、 提高频谱资源利用率, 提高了蜂窝网络的容量。
在使用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输时, eNB ( evolved Node B, 演进型基 站)分别为第一 UE和第二 UE分配授权频谱的无线资源, 并向第一 UE和第 二 UE发送用于指示对该授权频谱进行测量的测量配置, 第一 UE和第二 UE 将在测量过程中获取到的对端的信息和无线条件添加到测量结果中上报给 eNB, eNB在确定无线条件适于采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输时, 向第一 UE发送用于指示第一 UE在分配的无线资源上发送数据的第一控制信令且向 第二 UE发送用于指示第二 UE在分配的无线资源上接收数据的第二控制信令, 第一 UE根据第一控制信令在无线资源上发送数据, 第二 UE根据第二控制信 令在无线资源上接收数据, 实现第一 UE与第二 UE之间的数据传输。 其中, 授权频谱是指频语监管机构分配给指定无线接入系统独占使用的频谱。
发明人在实现本发明的过程中, 发现现有技术中至少存在以下缺陷: 由于 eNB 能够提供的授权频谱是一定的, 而业务对频谱和带宽的需求在 不断增加, 因此, eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以满足不 断增长的频谱需求, 导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高。 发明内容
为了解决 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以满足不断增 长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题,本 发明实施例提供了一种设备通信方法及装置。 所述技术方案如下:
第一方面, 本发明实施例提供了一种设备通信装置, 用于目标设备中, 所 述装置包括:
资源分配模块, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为用户设备 UE分配 所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟 争使用的频谱;
信令生成模块, 用于根据所述资源分配模块分配的所述第一无线资源生成 与所述 UE对应的控制信令, 所述控制信令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源 的指示信息;
信令发送模块, 用于向所述 UE发送所述信令生成模块生成的所述控制信 令, 以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的所述第一无线资源上采用设备到 设备 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述信令发送模块, 包括: 第一发送单元,用于通过演进型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第 二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令; 或,
第二发送单元, 用于通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述 控制信令, 所述第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 所述控制 信令指示信息是 eNB在所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源 上发送。
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第二种可能的实现 方式中, 所述第二发送单元, 包括:
第一发送子单元, 用于当所述目标设备是 eNB 时, 通过所述第二无线资 源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令指示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定 的所述第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在所述控制 信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令;
第二发送子单元, 用于当所述目标设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时, 确定接收所述控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB 发送的所述控制信令指示信息,再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三 无线资源向所述从 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指 示信息确定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令。
在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述装置还包括:
信号检测模块, 用于每隔预定时间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量;
第一通信模块, 用于在所述信号检测模块检测的结果为所述非授权频谱的 信号质量满足预设条件时,指示所述 UE采用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输; 第二通信模块, 用于在所述信号检测模块检测的结果为所述非授权频谱的 信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示所述 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 所述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述装置还包括:
数据传播模块,用于所述信令发送模块向所述 UE发送所述控制信令之后, 通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据;
数据发送模块, 用于若存在未接收到所述数据传播模块传播的所述数据的 从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源上再次向所述从 UE发送所述数据。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述资源分配模块, 包括:
第一分配单元, 用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE 中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的所述非 授权频谱中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资 源;
第二分配单元, 用于若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其 他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池,所述非授权 频谱资源池包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱,将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选 取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述资源分配模块, 包括:
第三分配单元,用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由 其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的所 述 eNB和所述其他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所 述第一无线资源;
第四分配单元, 用于若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一 个由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE,则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的 非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行 分配协商后确定共同占用的,将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频 谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述资源分配模块, 包括:
第五分配单元, 用于对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动 态为所述 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
第六分配单元, 用于根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分配所述 非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非授权频谱处 于可用状态时对所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
第二方面, 本发明实施例提供了一种设备通信装置, 用于目标设备中, 所 述装置包括:
处理器, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为用户设备 UE分配所述非 授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用 的频谱; 根据分配的所述第一无线资源生成与所述 UE对应的控制信令, 所述 控制信令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源的指示信息;
发射机, 用于向所述 UE发送所述处理器生成的所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的所述第一无线资源上采用设备到设备 D2D通信 模式实现数据传输。
在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述发射机, 具体用于通过演进 型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控 制信令; 或, 通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 所述第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 所述控制信令指示信 息是 eNB在所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
结合第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第二种可能的实现 方式中, 所述处理器, 具体用于当所述目标设备是 eNB 时, 通过所述第二无 线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令指示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息
确定的所述第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在所述 控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令; 当所述目标 设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时, 确定接收所述控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB发送的所述控制信令指示信息, 再通过 所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所述从 UE发送所述控制信 令, 以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源上接收 所述控制信令。
在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器, 还用于每隔预定时 间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量; 若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量 满足预设条件,则指示所述 UE采用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输; 若检测 结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则指示所述 UE采用小区 通信模式实现数据传输,所述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB进行数据传 输。
在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述发射机, 还用于向所述 UE发送所述 控制信令之后, 通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE 发送数据; 若存在未接收到所述数据的从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源 上再次向所述从 UE发送所述数据。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器, 具体用 于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,则 确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的所述非授权频谱中选取出的非授 权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源; 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的 非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配 的所述第一无线资源。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器, 具体用
于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的所述 eNB和所述其他 eNB 共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源; 若所述 目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频谱资源池,所述非授权频 谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同占用的, 将从 所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所 述第一无线资源。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器, 具体用 于对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输,动态为所述 UE分配所述非 授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或, 根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分 配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非授权 频谱处于可用状态时对所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
第三方面, 本发明实施例提供了一种设备通信方法, 用于目标设备中, 所 述方法包括:
在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为用户设备 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第 一无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱;
根据分配的所述第一无线资源生成与所述 UE对应的控制信令, 所述控制 信令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源的指示信息;
向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的 所述第一无线资源上采用设备到设备 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述向所述 UE发送所述控制信 令, 包括:
通过演进型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令; 或,
通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 所述第三 无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定,所述控制信令指示信息是 eNB 在所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第二种可能的实现
方式中, 所述通过所述第一无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 包括: 当所述目标设备是 eNB时,通过所述第二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控 制信令指示信息,再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所 述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述 第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令;
当所述目标设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时, 确定接收所述控制信令 的 UE是从 UE, 在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB发送的所述控制信令指 示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所述从 UE 发送所述控制信令, 以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三 无线资源上接收所述控制信令。
在第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述方法还包括:
每隔预定时间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量;
若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则指示所述 UE 采用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;
若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则指示所述 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输,所述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB 进行数据传输。
在第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述向所述 UE发送所述控制信令之后, 还包括:
通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据; 若存在未接收到所述数据的从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源上再次 向所述从 UE发送所述数据。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述为用户设备 UE 分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱,将所确定的所述非授权频谱中选取出的非 授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源;
若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从
UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池包括处于 可用状态的非授权频谱, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的 第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述为用户设备 UE 分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务 的 UE,则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的所述 eNB和所述其他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源; 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服 务的从 UE, 则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同 占用的,将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作 为分配的所述第一无线资源。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第二种 可能的实现方式或第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第四种可 能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述为用户设备 UE 分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输,动态为所述 UE分配所述 非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无 线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非授权频谱处于可用状态时对所述 非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
本发明实施例提供的技术方案的有益效果是:
通过在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资 源; 根据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有 用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指 示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于 可用状态的非授权频谱的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输, 而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模
式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信 模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE 之间的通信效率的效果。 附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例中的技术方案, 下面将对实施例描述中所 需要使用的附图作筒单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明 的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。
图 1是本发明一个实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架图;
图 2是本发明再一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架图;
图 3是本发明再一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架图;
图 4是本发明又一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架图;
图 5是本发明一个实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程图;
图 6是本发明另一实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程图;
图 7是本发明另一实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程图。 具体实施方式
为使本发明的目的、 技术方案和优点更加清楚, 下面将结合附图对本发明 实施方式作进一步地详细描述。 本实施例涉及一种设备通信方法,采用 D2D通信模式的 UE在非授权频谱 的无线资源上传输数据。 非授权频谱由各个无线接入系统竟争使用, 且无线接 入系统需要在使用一定时间后释放非授权频谱的无线资源, 空闲一定时间后重 新开始竟争非授权频谱的无线资源,从而给予各无线接入系统以公平竟争和使 用非授权频谱的无线资源的机会。 其中, 无线接入系统是指通过 RAT ( Radio Access Technology , 无线接入技术 )接入网络的系统。 无线接入系统包括蜂窝 网络系统、 WiFi ( Wireless Fidelity , 无线保真 ) 系统、 蓝牙系统和 Zigbee (紫 峰) 系统等。 蜂窝网络包括 LTE ( Long Term Evolution, 长期演进)、 LTE-A ( LTE- Advance , 高级长期演进技术)、 GSM ( Global System for Mobile communication , 全球移动通信 系 统 )、 UMTS ( Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System , 通用移动通信系统) 和 CDMA ( Code Division Multiple Access, 码分多址 ) 2000等。
本实施例以设备通信方法应用于 LTE-A 中为例进行说明, LTE-A的 CA ( Carrier Aggregation,载波聚合)通过将多个连续或者非连续的 CC( Component Carrier, 分量载波)进行聚合以提高用户峰值数据速率和系统吞吐量。 所聚合 的分量载波包括一个 PCelK Primary Cell,主小区)和 0至 5个 SCelK Secondary Cell, 辅小区)。 PCell是 UE执行随机接入过程初始接入系统时的小区或者执 行切换过程接入到目标基站时的小区。 PCell还提供安全性和 NAS( Non- Access Stratum, 非接入层)信令传输。 SCell主要提供额外的无线资源用于数据传输。 因此, LTE-A可以通过 CA技术利用非授权频谱, 即将非授权频语作为 SCell 使用。 请参考图 1 , 其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架 图。 该设备通信装置可以用于目标设备中, 包括:
资源分配模块 110, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频 谱;
目标设备在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态后, 即可为 UE分配非授权频谱 的第一无线资源。 比如, 频率区域是 5170-5190MHZ的非授权频谱处于可用状 态,则目标设备可以在 5170-5190MHZ中选取出 5170-5175MHz频率区域的 PRB ( Physical Resource Block, 物理资源块)用于采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传 输,再在 5170-5175MHz频率区域的 PRB中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源;或,目标设备可以直接在 5170-5190MHZ 中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源,用 于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D通信的 UE可以 选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB,本实施例不限定目标设备分配第 一无线资源的分配方式, 也不限定 D2D通信使用小区的上行资源还是下行资 源。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE
之间或 UE与 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线接入 系统造成严重干扰。
信令生成模块 120, 用于根据资源分配模 110块分配的第一无线资源生成 与 UE对应的控制信令,该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息; 为了使 UE明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 目标设备需要 获取第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到控制信令中发送给 UE。 其中,指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。 本实施例中时隙指传输时间间隔 TTI ( Transmission Time Interval ), 即一个调 度时间单位, 在 LTE中 1个 TTI对应于一个子帧 ( subframe ), 占用 1ms的时 间, 包括两个时槽(slot )。
信令发送模块 130, 用于向 UE发送信令生成模块 120生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传 输。
目标设备将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信 息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。 请参考图 2, 其示出了本发明再一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架 图。 该设备通信装置可以用于目标设备中, 本实施例以目标设备是蜂窝网络中 的 eNB为例进行说明, 该 eNB可以是微基站或小基站或宏基站, 通常上述不 同类型的基站发射功率和覆盖范围不同。 设备通信装置包括: 资源分配模块 110、 信令生成模块 120和信令发送模块 130;
资源分配模块 110, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授
权频谱的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频 谱;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为至少两个 UE中的每一个 UE配置载波。 具 体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频语的频段, SCell配置在非授权频谱的频 段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给 UE。
在载波配置完成后, eNB需要确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及至少 两个 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。以至少两个 UE分别是第 一 UE和第二 UE为例进行说明, 则 eNB可以分别向第一 UE和第二 UE下发 测量配置, 测量配置可以和配置载波使用同一个消息或者不同的消息发送给第 一 UE和第二 UE。第一 UE和第二 UE根据测量配置分别将测量得到的测量结 果发送给 eNB , eNB根据测量结果确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及至少 两个 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
具体地, 以 eNB向第一 UE发送测量配置为例进行说明, 则该测量配置指 示第一 UE对 SCell所在的非授权频谱进行频谱感知或频语检测, 第一 UE通 过物理层能量检测 (Energy Sensing 或 Energy Detection ) 或匹配滤波检测 ( Matched Filter Detection )或十办方差 巨阵检测 ( Co variance Matrix Detection ) 或循环平稳、特征检测 ( Cyclostationary Feature Detection )或基于特征值的频谱 感知 ( Eigenvalue Based Spectrum Sensing )或 RSSI ( Received Signal Strength Indication,接收信号强度指示)或干扰测量 ( Interference Measurement )或 SNR ( Signal To Noise Rate,信噪比)测量或 SINR( Signal To Interference Noise Rate, 信干噪比)测量或 ROT ( Rise Over Thermal, 热噪声攀升)测量等技术检测非 授权频谱的可用状态, 并将检测结果添加到测量报告中发送给 eNB。 eNB根据 测量结果确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态。 下文中对非授权频谱进行频谱感 知或频语检测的方法与本实施例中相同, 下文中不作赘述。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或 UE与 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线接入 系统造成严重干扰。
另外,测量配置还可以包括第一 UE的通信标识、 同步标识和发现信号等, 以便第一 UE在接收到同步标识时发送发现信号和通信标识, 第二 UE在接收
到测量配置包括的同步标识时接收第一 UE发送的发现信号和通信标识, 并根 据同步信号和 /或发现信号测量 RSRP ( Reference Signal Received Power, 参考 信号接收功率)或 CQI ( Channel Quality Indication, 信道质量指示)或路损 ( Pathloss )等, 将第一 UE的通信标识以及测量得到的其他数据添加到测量报 告中发送给 eNB , eNB在明确第一 UE和第二 UE之间的距离较近且信号质量 较好时,确定第一 UE和第二 UE之间可以在非授权频谱的无线资源上采用 D2D 通信模式传输数据。
eNB在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且至少两个 UE之间可以采用 D2D 通信模式传输数据后, 即可为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。 比如, 频 率区域是 5170-5190MHZ 的非授权频谱处于可用状态, 则 eNB 可以在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5175MHz频率区域的 PRB用于采用 D2D通信 模式实现数据传输, 再在 5170-5175MHZ 频率区域的 PRB 中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源; 或, eNB可 以直接在 5170-5190MHZ中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE 使用的第一无线资源, 用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不 同的 D2D通信的 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB,本实施 一无线资源的分配方式, 也不限定 D2D通信使用小区的
信令生成模块 120, 用于根据资源分配模 110块分配的第一无线资源生成 与 UE对应的控制信令,该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息; 为了使 UE明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, eNB需要获取 第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与 UE对应的控制信令中发送 给 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或 接收数据。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时, UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作或 发送操作, 因此, eNB还需要在控制信令中指示 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当第 一 UE发送数据、 第二 UE接收数据时, 与第一 UE对应的控制信令用于指示 第一 UE在某一个时隙从某一个频率区域发送数据, 与第二 UE对应的控制信 令用于指示第二 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置第 一 UE在第一类时隙发送数据, 第二 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及第一 UE 在第二类时隙接收数据, 第二 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类时隙和
第二类时隙不同, 它们共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则第一 UE和第二 UE 根据所预先配置的时隙位置发送和接收数据, 就不用 eNB 通过控制信令指示 UE的操作类型。
信令发送模块 130, 用于向 UE发送信令生成模块 120生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传 输。
eNB将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信息确 定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
可选的, 信令发送模块 130, 包括:
第一发送单元 131 , 用于通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源 向 UE发送控制信令; 或,
为了保证 UE能够正确接收到控制信令, 以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, eNB可以配置授权频谱的第二无线资源用于发送控制信令。 本实施例中, 由于 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段,因此, eNB可以通过 PCell上的 PDCCH( Physical Downlink Control Channel, 物理下行链路控制信道)或 EPDCCH ( Enhanced PDCCH, 增强的物理下行链路控制信道)向 UE发送控制信令。 当第二无线资 源用于 PDCCH时, 第二无线资源在时域上包含发送 PDCCH所在子帧的第一 至第二或第一至第三 OFDM ( Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing, 正 交频分复用)符号 (symbol ) 的控制域位置, 在频域上可以占用 PCell所在频 率范围的一部分, 由 PDCCH信令本身所需资源量如 PDCCH格式、 资源分配 信息等因素确定。 当第二无线资源用于 EPDCCH时, 资源的频率范围由 RRC ( Radio Resource Control,无线资源控制)信令预先配置,在时域上占用 PDCCH 控制域之外的 PDSCH ( Physical Downlink Shared Channel, 物理下行链路共享 信道)数据区域的 OFDM符号位置, 在频域上和 PDSCH上的用户数据采用 FDM ( Frequency Division Multiplexing, 频分复用 )方式进行复用, 具体占用 的资源量由 EPDCCH的格式和资源分配信息等因素确定。 下文中对第二无线 资源的确定和使用方式与本实施例中对第二无线资源的确定和使用方式相同, 下文中不作赘述。
第二发送单元 132, 用于通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制 信令, 第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示信息 是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了进一步避免或减少 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上的 资源, eNB还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 通过为 UE分配的第 三无线资源向 UE发送与 UE对应的控制信令。 此时, 为了使 UE明确在哪一 个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, eNB还需要预先在授权频谱的第二无 线资源上向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 该控制信令指示信息用于指示 UE在 哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令; 或, eNB可以对 UE接收控制信 令的时隙和资源进行预先配置, UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个 频率区域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第三无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输控制信令。 第三无线资源可用于 PDCCH或 EPDCCH, 资源的占用方式同第二无线资源, 只是第三无线资源位 于 SCell所在频率范围的一部分。 下文中对第三无线资源的确定和使用方式与 本实施例中对第三无线资源的确定和使用方式相同, 下文中不作赘述。
可选的, 第二发送单元 132, 包括:
第一发送子单元 1321 , 用于当目标设备是 eNB时, 通过第二无线资源向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再通过控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源上接收 控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为至少两个 UE分配发送控制信令 的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息添加到控制信令指 示信息中, 通过第二无线资源分别向每一个 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再在 第三无线资源上分别向每一个 UE发送与该 UE对应的控制信令, UE根据接收 到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三无线资源, 并在确定的第三无 线资源上接收控制信令。
可选的, 装置还包括:
信号检测模块, 用于每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量; 第一通信模块, 用于在信号检测模块检测的结果为非授权频谱的信号质量 满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;
第二通信模块, 用于在信号检测模块检测的结果为非授权频谱的信号质量 不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 小区通信模式 是指 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
由于 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传输数据不仅依赖于非
授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态, 还依赖于非授权频谱的信号质量, 因此, 为 了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB 可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量或每隔预定时间指示 UE检测非 授权频谱的信号质量。 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则 eNB确定继续采用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号 质量不满足预设条件, 则 eNB确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即第一 UE通 过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据 转发给第二 UE; 或者第一 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再 进一步把数据发送到核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB 或其他 eNB转发给第二 UE, 以实现 UE之间的数据传输。
需要补充说明的是, UE之间在采用小区通信模式进行数据传输时, eNB 还可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量,在检测结果为非授权频谱的 信号质量满足预设条件时,指示 UE采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;在检测 结果为非授权频谱的信号指令不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE继续采用小区通信 模式实现数据传输。
其中, 预设条件可以包括: 非授权频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值 和非授权频谱的无线条件低于门限值的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一 种。 当然, 还可以对预设条件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第一分配单元 111 ,用于若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提 供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的非授权频谱中 选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB可以直接为该至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。 具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是 5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB将所确定的非授权频谱中选 取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, eNB 在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第三分配单元 113 , 用于若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中存在至少一个由其他
eNB提供服务的 UE, 则与其他 eNB进行分配协商, 将协商得到的 eNB和其 他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由 其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源时, 还需要与 该其他 eNB进行协商。其中,作为目标设备的 eNB指为 UE提供 PCell和非授 权频谱上 SCell的 eNB, 其他 eNB指至少使用非授权频谱的其他 eNB, eNB 和其他 eNB可以相邻且提供不同的小区, 比如, 第一 eNB和第二 eNB; 或, eNB和其他 eNB可以提供基站间载波聚合的小区, 比如, 主 eNB和辅 eNB。
具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口将自身可以占用的 无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB, 其他 eNB在协商信息所 指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB 可以占用的无线资源, 并将确定的无线资 源作为第一无线资源, 其他 eNB再将确定的第一无线资源通知给 eNB。
假设 eNB向第一 UE提供服务, 其他 eNB向第二 UE提供服务, 则 eNB 根据确定的第三无线资源向第一 UE发送控制信令, 同时, 其他 eNB根据确定 的第三无线资源向第二 UE发送控制信令, 第一 UE和第二 UE在接收到控制 信令之后在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
需要说明的是,采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的 UE应该处于相同的不连续 接收 DRX ( Discontinueous Reception )状态, 例如第一 UE和第二 UE均处于 活动时间 ( active time )期间才能够接收控制信令。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第五分配单元 115 , 用于对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
本实施例中, UE之间可以采用 HARQ ( Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request, 混合自动重传 )技术进行数据传输, 则 eNB可以在每一次 HARQ新 传输时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所 述, 此处不赞述。
对于数据的 HARQ反馈可以通过非授权频谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱 的第六无线资源进行反馈, 第五无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反 馈, 第六无线资源用于在授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH ( Physical Uplink Control Channel, 物理上行链路控制信道 )或 PUSCH ( Physical Uplink Shared Channel, 物理上行链路共享信道)进行反馈或 SCell
上的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实施例不作限定。
当 HARQ反馈指示某一次的新传输数据丟失了,则需要进行 HARQ重传。 eNB可以在每一次 HARQ重传时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无 线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述; 或, eNB可以在每一次 HARQ重 传时使用上一次 HARQ重传或 HARQ新传输时分配的第一无线资源。
第六分配单元 116, 用于根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时 对非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, eNB可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配置 的半静态分配策略为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需对每 一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策略分 配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。
具体地, eNB可以通过 RRC信令分别为每一个 UE配置第一无线资源的 周期, 再通过 PDCCH或 EPDCCH分别向每一个 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由 于 SCell上的数据传输仅在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅仅 在非授权频谱处于可用状态时生效。
需要补充说明的是, 若采用 D2D 通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE 中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且 eNB动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB分别使用第三无线资 源给 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 UE在 接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输数据。 若 采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务且 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源,由于 UE是根据 非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的, 而不是控制信令, 因此, 控制 信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB 和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以在不 同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向第一 UE和第二 UE发送控制信令, 从而采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据的第一 UE和第二 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用 第一无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上述两 种发送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 请参考图 3 , 其示出了本发明再一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架 图。 该设备通信装置可以用于主 UE中, 则实施例中未声明是主 UE的 UE都 是从 UE,且主 UE与从 UE可以通过动态指定或通过半静态分配策略指定。设 备通信装置包括: 资源分配模块 110、 信令生成模块 120和信令发送模块 130;
资源分配模块 110, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频 谱;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为主 UE和至少一个从 UE中的每一个从 UE 配置载波。 具体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, SCell配置在非 授权频谱的频段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给主 UE 和至少一个从 UE。
在载波配置完成后, eNB 需要确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。 以主 UE和 从 UE为例进行说明, 则 eNB可以分别向主 UE和从 UE下发测量配置, 测量 配置可以和配置载波使用同一个消息或者不同的消息发送给主 UE和从 UE。 主 UE和从 UE根据测量配置分别将测量得到的测量结果发送给 eNB, eNB根 据测量结果确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及主 UE和从 UE之间能否采
用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
具体地, 以 eNB向主 UE发送测量配置为例进行说明, 则该测量配置指示 主 UE对 SCell所在的非授权频谱进行频谱感知或频语检测, 并将检测结果添 加到测量报告中发送给 eNB。 eNB根据测量结果确定非授权频谱是否处于可用 状态。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或主 UE与从 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线 接入系统造成严重干扰。
另外, 测量配置还可以包括主 UE的通信标识、 同步标识和发现信号等, 以便主 UE在接收到同步标识时发送发现信号和通信标识, 从 UE在接收到测 量配置包括的同步标识时接收主 UE发送的发现信号和通信标识, 并根据同步 信号和 /或发现信号测量 RSRP或 CQI或路损等,将主 UE的通信标识以及测量 得到的其他数据添加到测量报告中发送给 eNB , eNB在明确主 UE和从 UE之 间的距离较近且信号质量较好时, 确定主 UE和从 UE之间可以在非授权频谱 的无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传输数据。
主 UE在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且主 UE和从 UE之间可以采用 D2D通信模式传输数据后, 即可为从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。
信令生成模块 120, 用于根据资源分配模 110块分配的第一无线资源生成 与 UE对应的控制信令,该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息; 为了使从 UE明确为从 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 主 UE需 要获取第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与从 UE对应的控制信 令中发送给从 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频 率区域发送或接收数据。 本发明中时隙指传输时间间隔 ΤΉ, 即一个调度时间 单位, 在 LTE中 1个 ΤΉ对应于一个子帧, 占用 lms的时间, 包括两个时槽。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时,从 UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作 或发送操作, 因此, 主 UE还需要在控制信令中指示从 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当主 UE发送数据、 从 UE接收数据时, 与从 UE对应的控制信令用于指示从 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置主 UE在第一类时 隙发送数据, 从 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及主 UE在第二类时隙接收数
据, 从 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类时隙和第二类时隙不同, 它们 共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则主 UE和从 UE根据所预先配置的时隙位置 发送和接收数据, 就不用主 UE通过控制信令指示从 UE的操作类型。
信令发送模块 130, 用于向 UE发送信令生成模块 120生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传 输。
主 UE将控制信令发送给从 UE之后, 从 UE即可根据控制信令中的指示 信息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
可选的, 信令发送模块 130, 包括:
第一发送单元 131 , 用于通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源 向 UE发送控制信令; 或,
为了保证从 UE能够正确接收到控制信令,以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, 主 UE可以通过授权频谱的第二无线资源向从 UE发送控制信令。本实施例中, 由于 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, 因此, 主 UE可以通过 PCell上的 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH或 PUCCH向从 UE发送控制信令。
第二发送单元 132, 用于通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制 信令, 第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示信息 是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了进一步避免或减少主 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上 的资源, 主 UE还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 通过为从 UE分 配的第三无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。此时, 为了使主 UE 明确在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送控制信令以及从 UE明确在哪一个时 隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, eNB需要预先在授权频谱的第二无线资源 上向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 并在授权频谱的第二无线 资源上向从 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息用 于指示主 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, 与从 UE对应的 控制信令指示信息用于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信 令; 或,
eNB可以对主 UE发送控制信令的时隙和资源以及从 UE接收控制信令的 时隙和资源进行预先配置, 主 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频 率区域发送控制信令, 从 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区
域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第三无 线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输控制信令。
可选的, 第二发送单元 132, 包括:
第二发送子单元 1322, 用于当目标设备是发送控制信令的主 UE时, 确定 接收控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在第二无线资源上接收 eNB发送的控制信令指 示信息,再通过控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源向从 UE发送控制信令, 以便从 UE在控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为主 UE和至少一个从 UE分配发 送控制信令的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息分别添 加到与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息和与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息中, 通过第二无线资源向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息以及通过第 二无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE在控制信 令指示信息所指示的第三无线资源上向每一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制 信令, 每一个从 UE根据接收到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三 无线资源, 并在确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
可选的, 装置还包括:
信号检测模块, 用于每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量;
第一通信模块, 用于在信号检测模块检测的结果为非授权频谱的信号质量 满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;
第二通信模块, 用于在信号检测模块检测的结果为非授权频谱的信号质量 不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 小区通信模式 是指 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
由于主 UE和至少一个从 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传 输数据不仅依赖于非授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态,还依赖于非授权频谱的 信号质量, 因此, 为了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致主 UE和至少一个 从 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的 信号质量或每隔预定时间指示主 UE或从 UE检测非授权频谱的信号质量。
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则主 UE确定继续采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设 条件, 则主 UE确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即主 UE通过第二无线资源 将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据转发给从 UE;
或者主 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再进一步把数据发送到 核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB或其他 eNB转发给 从 UE, 以实现主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间的数据传输。
需要补充说明的是, 主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间在采用小区通信模式进 行数据传输时, eNB或主 UE或从 UE还可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的 信号质量, 在检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件时, 指示主 UE 和至少一个从 UE采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;在检测结果为非授权频谱 的信号指令不满足预设条件时, 指示主 UE和至少一个从 UE继续采用小区通 信模式实现数据传输。
其中, 预设条件可以包括: 非授权频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值 和非授权频谱的无线条件低于门限值的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一 种。 当然, 还可以对预设条件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
可选的,若目标设备是主 UE且 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式,则装置 还包括:
数据传播模块 140, 用于信令发送模块 130向 UE发送控制信令之后, 通 过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据;
数据发送模块 150, 用于若存在未接收到数据传播模块 140传播的数据的 从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第二无线资源上再次向从 UE发送数据。
本实施例中, 当从 UE为一个时, 主 UE可以通过单播方式在第一无线资 源上向该从 UE发送数据, 实现采用 D2D通信模式传输数据。 或, 当从 UE至 少为一个时, 主 UE可以通过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据, 从 UE对数据的接收状态进行反馈。 若存在未接收到数据的从 UE, 则主 UE确定不能通过第一无线资源向该从 UE发送数据, 则通过授权频 谱的第四无线资源再次向该从 UE发送数据, 第四无线资源用于在授权频谱上 传输数据。 或者, 主 UE也可以通过检测得到的非授权频谱的信号质量确定从 UE是否接收到数据, 本实施例不限定对未接收到数据的从 UE的确定方式。
需要补充说明的是, 主 UE采用何种方式向从 UE发送数据是由控制信令 确定的。 比如, 若控制信令的指示信息包括的是单个从 UE 的 C-RNTI ( Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier, 小区-无线网络临时标识)或 D2D-RNTI ( D2D Radio Network Temporary Identifier, D2D-无线网络临时标识), 则指示 主 UE通过单播方式在第一无线资源上向从 UE发送数据; 若控制信令的指示
信息包括的是 Group RNTI ( Group Radio Network Temporary Identifier, 组无线 网络临时标识 ), 则指示主 UE通过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向从 UE 发送数据。
进一步地, eNB可以向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息且通 过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE通过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第二分配单元 112,用于若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB 提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池, 非授权频谱资源池 包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将从非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频 谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的每一个从 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则主 UE可以直接为该每一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是 5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB再在处于可用状态的非授权 频谱中确定非授权频谱资源池, 将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 比 如, 非授权频谱资源池是频率区域为 5170-5175MHZ的无线资源; 主 UE接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池,将所确定的非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授 权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, 主 UE 在 5170-5175MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。 用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D 通信的主 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第四分配单元 114, 用于若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中存在至少一个由 其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE,则接收向主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频 谱资源池, 非授权频谱资源池是 eNB与其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同占 用的,将从非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配 的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱资源池时, 还需要与该其他 eNB进 行协商。 其中, eNB指为主 UE提供 PCell和非授权频谱上 SCell的 eNB, 其
他 eNB指至少使用非授权频谱的其他 eNB, eNB和其他 eNB可以相邻且提供 不同的小区, 比如, 第一 eNB和第二 eNB; 或, eNB和其他 eNB可以提供基 站间载波聚合的小区, 比如, 主 eNB和辅 eNB。
具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口将自身可以占用的 无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB, 其他 eNB在协商信息所 指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB 可以占用的无线资源, 并将共同占用的无 线资源确定为非授权频谱资源池, 其他 eNB 再将确定的非授权频谱资源池通 知给 eNB。 eNB将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 主 UE将从非授权 频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
假设 eNB向主 UE提供服务, 其他 eNB向从 UE提供服务, 则 eNB将确 定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 其他 eNB将确定的非授权频谱资源池分 配给从 UE, 主 UE在非授权频谱资源池中选取出第一无线资源, 根据第一无 线资源生成与从 UE对应的控制信令,将控制信令发送给从 UE,从 UE在接收 到控制信令之后在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式与主 UE进行数据传输。
需要说明的是,采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的主 UE和从 UE应该处于相 同的不连续接收 DRX状态,例如主 UE和从 UE均处于活动时间期间才能够传 输控制信令。
可选的, 资源分配模块 110, 包括:
第五分配单元 115 , 用于对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
本实施例中, 主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间可以采用 HARQ技术进行数据 传输, 则主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ新传输时动态为至少一个从 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。
对于数据的 HARQ反馈可以通过非授权频谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱 的第六无线资源进行反馈, 第五无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反 馈, 第六无线资源用于在授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈或 SCell上的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实 施例不作限定。
当 HARQ反馈指示某一次的新传输数据丟失了,则需要进行 HARQ重传。 主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ重传时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一 无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述; 或, 主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ
重传时使用上一次 HARQ重传或 HARQ新传输时分配的第一无线资源。
第六分配单元 116, 用于根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时 对非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, 主 UE可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配 置的半静态分配策略为至少一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需 对每一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策 略分配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。
具体地,主 UE可以通过 RRC信令分别为每一个从 UE配置第一无线资源 的周期,再通过 PDCCH或 EPDCCH分别向每一个从 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由于 SCell上的数据传输仅在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅 仅在非授权频谱处于可用状态时生效。
需要补充说明的是,若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至 少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且主 UE动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB 根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB 共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB各自使用第三无线资源给 主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 从 UE在接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输 数据。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务且主 UE根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 由于从 UE是 根据非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的, 而不是控制信令, 因此, 控制信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以 在不同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令, 从而采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据的主 UE和从 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一 无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上述两种发 送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示
信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 请参考图 4, 其示出了本发明又一实施例提供的设备通信装置的结构框架 图。 该设备通信装置可以用于目标设备中, 包括: 处理器 410、 发射机 420和 存储器 440。 处理器 410与发射机 420耦合, 发射机 420与存储器 430耦合。
存储器 430中存储计算机程序, 处理器 410可以通过访问所述计算机程序 执行如下操作:
处理器 410, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱 的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱; 根 据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指 示第一无线资源的指示信息;
目标设备在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态后, 即可为 UE分配非授权频谱 的第一无线资源。 比如, 频率区域是 5170-5190MHZ的非授权频谱处于可用状 态,则目标设备可以在 5170-5190MHZ中选取出 5170-5175MHz频率区域的 PRB 用于采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 再在 5170-5175MHZ频率区域的 PRB 中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源;或, 目标设备可以直接在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB 作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源,用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D通信的 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB, 本实施例不限定目标设备分配第一无线资源的分配方式, 也不限定 D2D通信 使用小区的上行资源还是下行资源。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空
闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或 UE与 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线接入 系统造成严重干扰。
为了使 UE明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 目标设备需要 获取第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到控制信令中发送给 UE。 其中,指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。 本实施例中时隙指传输时间间隔 ΤΉ, 即一个调度时间单位, 在 LTE中 1 个 ΤΉ对应于一个子帧, 占用 lms的时间, 包括两个时槽。
发射机 420, 用于向 UE发送处理器 410生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根 据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
目标设备将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信 息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。 本发明另一实施例提供了一种设备通信装置, 该设备通信装置可以用于目 标设备中, 本实施例以目标设备是蜂窝网络中的 eNB为例进行说明, 该 eNB 可以是微基站或小基站或宏基站, 通常上述不同类型的基站发射功率和覆盖范 围不同。 该设备通信装置, 可以包括: 处理器 410、 发射机 420和存储器 440。 发射机 420与处理器 410耦合, 处理器 410与存储器 430耦合。
存储器 430中存储计算机程序, 处理器 410可以通过访问所述计算机程序 执行如下操作:
处理器 410, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱
的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱; 根 据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指 示第一无线资源的指示信息;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为至少两个 UE中的每一个 UE配置载波。 具 体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频语的频段, SCell配置在非授权频谱的频 段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给 UE。 在载波配置完成后, eNB需要 确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及至少两个 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模 式进行数据传输。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或 UE与 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线接入 系统造成严重干扰。
eNB在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且至少两个 UE之间可以采用 D2D 通信模式传输数据后,即可为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。为了使 UE 明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, eNB需要获取第一无线资源的 指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与 UE对应的控制信令中发送给 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时, UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作或 发送操作, 因此, eNB还需要在控制信令中指示 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当第 一 UE发送数据、 第二 UE接收数据时, 与第一 UE对应的控制信令用于指示 第一 UE在某一个时隙从某一个频率区域发送数据, 与第二 UE对应的控制信 令用于指示第二 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置第 一 UE在第一类时隙发送数据, 第二 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及第一 UE 在第二类时隙接收数据, 第二 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类子帧和 第二类时隙不同, 它们共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则第一 UE和第二 UE 根据所预先配置的时隙位置发送和接收数据, 就不用 eNB 通过控制信令指示 UE的操作类型。
发射机 420, 用于向 UE发送处理器 410生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根 据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
eNB将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信息确
定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
可选的, 发射机 420, 具体用于通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无 线资源向 UE发送控制信令; 或, 通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送 控制信令, 第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示 信息是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了保证 UE能够正确接收到控制信令, 以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, eNB可以配置授权频谱的第二无线资源用于发送控制信令。 本实施例中, 由于 PCell 配置在授权频谱的频段, 因此, eNB 可以通过 PCell 上的 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH向 UE发送控制信令。 或,
为了进一步避免或减少 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上的 资源, eNB还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 通过为 UE分配的第 三无线资源向 UE发送与 UE对应的控制信令。 此时, 为了使 UE明确在哪一 个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, eNB还需要预先在授权频谱的第二无 线资源上向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 该控制信令指示信息用于指示 UE在 哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令; 或, eNB可以对 UE接收控制信 令的时隙和资源进行预先配置, UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个 频率区域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第三无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输控制信令。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于当目标设备是 eNB时, 通过第二无线资源 向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再通过控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源上接 收控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为至少两个 UE分配发送控制信令 的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息添加到控制信令指 示信息中, 通过第二无线资源分别向每一个 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再在 第三无线资源上分别向每一个 UE发送与该 UE对应的控制信令, UE根据接收 到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三无线资源, 并在确定的第三无 线资源上接收控制信令。
可选的, 处理器 410, 还用于每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件,则指示 UE采用 D2D通信 模式实现数据传输; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则
指示 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 小区通信模式是指 UE通过 eNB进 行数据传输。
由于 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传输数据不仅依赖于非 授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态, 还依赖于非授权频谱的信号质量, 因此, 为 了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB 可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量或每隔预定时间指示 UE检测非 授权频谱的信号质量。
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则 eNB 确定继续采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设 条件, 则 eNB确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即第一 UE通过第二无线资源 将数据发送给 eNB , eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据转发给第二 UE; 或者第一 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再进一步把数据发送 到核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB或其他 eNB转发 给第二 UE, 以实现 UE之间的数据传输。
其中, 预设条件可以包括: 非授权频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值 和非授权频谱的无线条件低于门限值的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一 种。 当然, 还可以对预设条件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的非授权 频谱中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB可以直接为该至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。 具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是 5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB将所确定的非授权频谱中选 取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, eNB 在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中存在至少一个 由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,则与其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的 eNB 和其他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由
其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源时, 还需要与 该其他 eNB进行协商。 具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口 将自身可以占用的无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB , 其他 eNB在协商信息所指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB可以占用的无线资源, 并将确定的无线资源作为第一无线资源, 其他 eNB 再将确定的第一无线资源 通知给 eNB。
可选的,处理器 410,具体用于对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或, 根据预先配置的半静态分配 策略为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权 频谱处于可用状态时对非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, UE之间可以采用 HARQ技术进行数据传输, 则 eNB可以在 每一次 HARQ新传输时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 对于数据的 HARQ反馈可以通过非授权频 谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱的第六无线资源进行反馈, 第五无线资源用于在 非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈, 第六无线资源用于在授权频谱上传输 HARQ 反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈或 SCell上的 PUCCH 或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实施例不作限定。
本实施例中, eNB可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配置 的半静态分配策略为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需对每 一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策略分 配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 具体地, eNB 可以通过 RRC信令分别为每一个 UE 配置第一无线资源的周期, 再通过 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH分别向每一个 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由于 SCell上的数据传输仅 在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅仅在非授权频谱处于可用状 态时生效。
需要补充说明的是, 若采用 D2D 通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE 中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且 eNB动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB分别使用第三无线资 源给 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 UE在 接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输数据。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由 其他 eNB提供服务且 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 由于 UE 是根据非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的,而不是控制信令,因此, 控制信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以 在不同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向第一 UE和第二 UE发送控制信令, 从 而采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的第一 UE和第二 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同 占用第一无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上 述两种发送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 本发明另一实施例提供了一种设备通信装置, 该设备通信装置可以用于主 UE中, 则实施例中未声明是主 UE的 UE都是从 UE, 且主 UE与从 UE可以 通过动态指定或通过半静态分配策略指定。 该设备通信装置, 可以包括: 处理 器 410、发射机 420和存储器 440。 发射机 420与处理器 410耦合, 处理器 410 与存储器 430耦合。
存储器 430中存储计算机程序, 处理器 410可以通过访问所述计算机程序 执行如下操作:
处理器 410, 用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱
的第一无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱; 根 据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指 示第一无线资源的指示信息;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为主 UE和至少一个从 UE中的每一个从 UE 配置载波。 具体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, SCell配置在非 授权频谱的频段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给主 UE 和至少一个从 UE。 在载波配置完成后, eNB 需要确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或主 UE与从 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线 接入系统造成严重干扰。
主 UE在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且主 UE和从 UE之间可以采用 D2D通信模式传输数据后, 即可为从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。 为 了使从 UE明确为从 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 主 UE需要获取 第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与从 UE对应的控制信令中发 送给从 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域 发送或接收数据。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时,从 UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作 或发送操作, 因此, 主 UE还需要在控制信令中指示从 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当主 UE发送数据、 从 UE接收数据时, 与从 UE对应的控制信令用于指示从 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置主 UE在第一类时 隙发送数据, 从 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及主 UE在第二类时隙接收数 据, 从 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类时隙和第二类时隙不同, 它们 共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则主 UE和从 UE根据所预先配置的时隙位置 发送和接收数据, 就不用主 UE通过控制信令指示从 UE的操作类型。
发射机 420, 用于向 UE发送处理器 410生成的控制信令, 以便 UE在根 据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
主 UE将控制信令发送给从 UE之后, 从 UE即可根据控制信令中的指示 信息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
可选的, 发射机 420, 具体用于通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无 线资源向 UE发送控制信令; 或, 通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送 控制信令, 第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示 信息是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了保证从 UE能够正确接收到控制信令,以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, 主 UE可以通过授权频谱的第二无线资源向从 UE发送控制信令。本实施例中, 由于 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, 因此, 主 UE可以通过 PCell上的 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH或 PUCCH向从 UE发送控制信令。 或,
为了进一步避免或减少主 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上 的资源, 主 UE还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 通过为从 UE分 配的第三无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。此时, 为了使主 UE 明确在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送控制信令以及从 UE明确在哪一个时 隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, eNB需要预先在授权频谱的第二无线资源 上向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 并在授权频谱的第二无线 资源上向从 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息用 于指示主 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, 与从 UE对应的 控制信令指示信息用于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信 令; 或, eNB可以对主 UE发送控制信令的时隙和资源以及从 UE接收控制信 令的时隙和资源进行预先配置, 主 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一 个频率区域发送控制信令, 从 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频 率区域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第 三无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输控制信令。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于当目标设备是发送控制信令的主 UE时, 确定接收控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在第二无线资源上接收 eNB发送的控制信 令指示信息, 再通过控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源向从 UE发送控制 信令, 以便从 UE在控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为主 UE和至少一个从 UE分配发 送控制信令的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息分别添 加到与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息和与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息中, 通过第二无线资源向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息以及通过第 二无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE在控制信
令指示信息所指示的第三无线资源上向每一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制 信令, 每一个从 UE根据接收到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三 无线资源, 并在确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
可选的, 处理器 410, 还用于每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件,则指示 UE采用 D2D通信 模式实现数据传输; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则 指示 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 小区通信模式是指 UE通过 eNB进 行数据传输。
由于主 UE和至少一个从 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传 输数据不仅依赖于非授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态,还依赖于非授权频谱的 信号质量, 因此, 为了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致主 UE和至少一个 从 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的 信号质量或每隔预定时间指示主 UE或从 UE检测非授权频谱的信号质量。
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则主 UE确定继续采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设 条件, 则主 UE确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即主 UE通过第二无线资源 将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据转发给从 UE; 或者主 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再进一步把数据发送到 核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB或其他 eNB转发给 从 UE, 以实现主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间的数据传输。
其中, 预设条件可以包括: 非授权频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值 和非授权频谱的无线条件低于门限值的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一 种。 当然, 还可以对预设条件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
可选的,若目标设备是主 UE且 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式,则发射 机 420, 还用于向 UE发送控制信令之后, 通过广播或组播方式在第一无线资 源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据; 若存在未接收到数据的从 UE, 则在授权频 谱的第二无线资源上再次向从 UE发送数据。
本实施例中, 当从 UE为一个时, 主 UE可以通过单播方式在第一无线资 源上向该从 UE发送数据, 实现采用 D2D通信模式传输数据。 或, 当从 UE至 少为一个时, 主 UE可以通过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据, 从 UE对数据的接收状态进行反馈。 若存在未接收到数据的从
UE, 则主 UE确定不能通过第一无线资源向该从 UE发送数据, 则通过授权频 谱的第四无线资源再次向该从 UE发送数据, 第四无线资源用于在授权频谱上 传输数据。 或者, 主 UE也可以通过检测得到的非授权频谱的信号质量确定从 UE是否接收到数据, 本实施例不限定对未接收到数据的从 UE的确定方式。
需要补充说明的是, 主 UE采用何种方式向从 UE发送数据是由控制信令 确定的。 比如, 若控制信令的指示信息包括的是单个从 UE 的 C-RNTI 或 D2D-RNTI, 则指示主 UE通过单播方式在第一无线资源上向从 UE发送数据; 若控制信令的指示信息包括的是 Group RNTI,则指示主 UE通过广播或组播方 式在第一无线资源上向从 UE发送数据。
进一步地, eNB可以向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息且通 过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE通过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中不存在由 其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池, 非授权频 谱资源池包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱,将从非授权频谱资源池中选取出的 非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的每一个从 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则主 UE可以直接为该每一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是 5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB再在处于可用状态的非授权 频谱中确定非授权频谱资源池, 将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 比 如, 非授权频谱资源池是频率区域为 5170-5175MHZ的无线资源; 主 UE接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池,将所确定的非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授 权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, 主 UE 在 5170-5175MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。 用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D 通信的主 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB。
可选的, 处理器 410, 具体用于若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中存在至少 一个由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE,则接收向主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非 授权频谱资源池, 非授权频谱资源池是 eNB与其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定 共同占用的, 将从非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作
为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱资源池时, 还需要与该其他 eNB进 行协商。 具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口将自身可以占 用的无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB, 其他 eNB在协商信 息所指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB 可以占用的无线资源, 并将共同占用 的无线资源确定为非授权频谱资源池, 其他 eNB再将确定的非授权频谱资源 池通知给 eNB。 eNB将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 主 UE将从非 授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线 资源。
可选的,处理器 410,具体用于对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或, 根据预先配置的半静态分配 策略为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权 频谱处于可用状态时对非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, 主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间可以采用 HARQ技术进行数据 传输, 则主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ新传输时动态为至少一个从 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 对于数据的 HARQ 反馈可以通过非授权频谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱的第六无线资源进行反 馈, 第五无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈, 第六无线资源用于 在授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行 反馈或 SCell上的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实施例不作限定。
本实施例中, 主 UE可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配 置的半静态分配策略为至少一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需 对每一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策 略分配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 具体地, 主 UE可以 通过 RRC信令分别为每一个从 UE配置第一无线资源的周期, 再通过 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH分别向每一个从 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由于 SCell上的数据传 输仅在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅仅在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时生效。
需要补充说明的是,若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至 少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且主 UE动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB
根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB 共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB各自使用第三无线资源给 主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 从 UE在接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输 数据。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务且主 UE根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 由于从 UE是 根据非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的, 而不是控制信令, 因此, 控制信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以 在不同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令, 从而采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据的主 UE和从 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一 无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上述两种发 送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信装置, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 请参见图 5 , 其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程 图。 该设备通信方法可以用于目标设备中, 包括:
步骤 501 , 在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一
无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱;
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或 UE与 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线接入 系统造成严重干扰。
目标设备在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态后, 即可为 UE分配非授权频谱 的第一无线资源。 比如, 频率区域是 5170-5190MHZ的非授权频谱处于可用状 态,则目标设备可以在 5170-5190MHZ中选取出 5170-5175MHz频率区域的 PRB 用于采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 再在 5170-5175MHZ频率区域的 PRB 中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源;或, 目标设备可以直接在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB 作为供 UE使用的第一无线资源,用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D通信的 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB, 本实施例不限定目标设备分配第一无线资源的分配方式, 也不限定 D2D通信 使用小区的上行资源还是下行资源。
步骤 502, 根据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制 信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息;
为了使 UE明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 目标设备需要 获取第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到控制信令中发送给 UE。 其中,指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。 本发明中时隙指传输时间间隔 ΤΉ, 即一个调度时间单位, 在 LTE中 1个 TTI 对应于一个子帧, 占用 lms的时间, 包括两个时槽。
步骤 503, 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无 线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
目标设备将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信 息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信方法, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上
采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。 请参见图 6, 其示出了本发明另一实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程 图。 该设备通信方法可以用于目标设备中, 本实施例以目标设备是蜂窝网络中 的 eNB为例进行说明, 该 eNB可以是微基站或小基站或宏基站, 通常上述不 同类型的基站发射功率和覆盖范围不同。 设备通信方法, 包括:
步骤 601 , 在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一 无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为至少两个 UE中的每一个 UE配置载波。 具 体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频语的频段, SCell配置在非授权频谱的频 段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给 UE。 在载波配置完成后, eNB需要 确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及至少两个 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模 式进行数据传输。 以至少两个 UE分别是第一 UE和第二 UE为例进行说明, 则 eNB可以分别向第一 UE和第二 UE下发测量配置, 测量配置可以和配置载 波使用同一个消息或者不同的消息发送给第一 UE和第二 UE。第一 UE和第二 UE根据测量配置分别将测量得到的测量结果发送给 eNB, eNB根据测量结果 确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及至少两个 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模 式进行数据传输。
eNB在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且至少两个 UE之间可以采用 D2D 通信模式传输数据后, 即可为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。
第一, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE ,则确定处 于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的非授权频谱中选取出的非授权频谱的第 一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB可以直接为该至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。 具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱资源, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是
5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB将所确定的非授权频谱中选 取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, eNB 在 5170-5190MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。
第二, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若目标设备是 eNB且 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,则 与其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用的非授权 频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由 其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源时, 还需要与 该其他 eNB进行协商。其中,作为目标设备的 eNB指为 UE提供 PCell和非授 权频谱上 SCell的 eNB, 其他 eNB指至少使用非授权频谱的其他 eNB, eNB 和其他 eNB可以相邻且提供不同的小区, 比如, 第一 eNB和第二 eNB; 或, eNB和其他 eNB可以提供基站间载波聚合的小区, 比如, 主 eNB和辅 eNB。
具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口将自身可以占用的 无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB, 其他 eNB在协商信息所 指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB 可以占用的无线资源, 并将确定的无线资 源作为第一无线资源, 其他 eNB再将确定的第一无线资源通知给 eNB。
假设 eNB向第一 UE提供服务, 其他 eNB向第二 UE提供服务, 则 eNB 根据确定的第三无线资源向第一 UE发送控制信令, 同时, 其他 eNB根据确定 的第三无线资源向第二 UE发送控制信令, 第一 UE和第二 UE在接收到控制 信令之后在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
需要说明的是,采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的 UE应该处于相同的不连续 接收 DRX状态,例如第一 UE和第二 UE均处于活动时间期间才能够接收控制 信令。
第三, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输,动态为 UE分配非授权频谱的 第一无线资源; 或,
根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时对非授权频谱的第一无 线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, UE之间可以采用 HARQ技术进行数据传输, 则 eNB可以在 每一次 HARQ新传输时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 对于数据的 HARQ反馈可以通过非授权频 谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱的第六无线资源进行反馈, 第五无线资源用于在 非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈, 第六无线资源用于在授权频谱上传输 HARQ 反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈或 SCell上的 PUCCH 或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实施例不作限定。
当 HARQ反馈指示某一次的新传输数据丟失了,则需要进行 HARQ重传。 eNB可以在每一次 HARQ重传时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无 线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述; 或, eNB可以在每一次 HARQ重 传时使用上一次 HARQ重传或 HARQ新传输时分配的第一无线资源。
本实施例中, eNB可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配置 的半静态分配策略为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需对每 一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策略分 配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 具体地, eNB 可以通过 RRC信令分别为每一个 UE 配置第一无线资源的周期, 再通过 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH分别向每一个 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由于 SCell上的数据传输仅 在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅仅在非授权频谱处于可用状 态时生效。
步骤 602, 根据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制 信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息;
为了使 UE明确为 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, eNB需要获取 第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与 UE对应的控制信令中发送 给 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或 接收数据。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时, UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作或 发送操作, 因此, eNB还需要在控制信令中指示 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当第 一 UE发送数据、 第二 UE接收数据时, 与第一 UE对应的控制信令用于指示 第一 UE在某一个时隙从某一个频率区域发送数据, 与第二 UE对应的控制信 令用于指示第二 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置第 一 UE在第一类时隙发送数据, 第二 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及第一 UE
在第二类时隙接收数据, 第二 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类时隙和 第二类时隙不同, 它们共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则第一 UE和第二 UE 根据所预先配置的时隙位置发送和接收数据, 就不用 eNB 通过控制信令指示 UE的操作类型。
步骤 603, 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无 线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
eNB将控制信令发送给 UE之后, UE即可根据控制信令中的指示信息确 定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
其中, 向 UE发送控制信令, 包括:
通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向 UE发送控制信令;或, 通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 第三无线资源由控 制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示信息是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配 置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了保证 UE能够正确接收到控制信令, 以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, eNB可以配置授权频谱的第二无线资源用于发送控制信令。 本实施例中, 由于 PCell 配置在授权频谱的频段, 因此, eNB 可以通过 PCell 上的 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH向 UE发送控制信令。 或,
为了进一步避免或减少 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上的 资源, eNB还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 通过为 UE分配的第 三无线资源向 UE发送与 UE对应的控制信令。 此时, 为了使 UE明确在哪一 个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, eNB还需要预先在授权频谱的第二无 线资源上向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 该控制信令指示信息用于指示 UE在 哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令; 或, eNB可以对 UE接收控制信 令的时隙和资源进行预先配置, UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个 频率区域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第三无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输控制信令。
具体地, 通过第一无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 包括:
当目标设备是 eNB时, 通过第二无线资源向 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再通过控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE 在控制信令指示信息确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为至少两个 UE分配发送控制信令
的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息添加到控制信令指 示信息中, 通过第二无线资源分别向每一个 UE发送控制信令指示信息, 再在 第三无线资源上分别向每一个 UE发送与该 UE对应的控制信令, UE根据接收 到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三无线资源, 并在确定的第三无 线资源上接收控制信令。
需要补充说明的是, 本实施例提供的方法还包括:
每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量;
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则指示 UE采用 D2D 通信模式实现数据传输;
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 该小区通信模式是指 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
由于 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传输数据不仅依赖于非 授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态, 还依赖于非授权频谱的信号质量, 因此, 为 了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB 可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量或每隔预定时间指示 UE检测非 授权频谱的信号质量。
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则 eNB 确定继续采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设 条件, 则 eNB确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即第一 UE通过第二无线资源 将数据发送给 eNB , eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据转发给第二 UE; 或者第一 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再进一步把数据发送 到核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB或其他 eNB转发 给第二 UE, 以实现 UE之间的数据传输。 其中, 预设条件可以包括: 非授权 频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值和非授权频谱的无线条件低于门限值 的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一种。当然,还可以对预设条件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
需要补充说明的是, 若采用 D2D 通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE 中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且 eNB动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB分别使用第三无线资 源给 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 UE在
接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输数据。 若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的至少两个 UE中存在至少一个 UE由 其他 eNB提供服务且 eNB根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 由于 UE 是根据非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的,而不是控制信令,因此, 控制信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以 在不同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向第一 UE和第二 UE发送控制信令, 从 而采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的第一 UE和第二 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同 占用第一无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上 述两种发送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信方法, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 请参见图 7, 其示出了本发明另一实施例提供的设备通信方法的方法流程 图。 该设备通信方法可以用于主 UE中, 则实施例中未声明是主 UE的 UE都 是从 UE,且主 UE与从 UE可以通过动态指定或通过半静态分配策略指定。设 备通信方法包括:
步骤 701 , 在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一 无线资源, 该非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱;
本实施例中, eNB需要分别为主 UE和至少一个从 UE中的每一个从 UE
配置载波。 具体地, eNB可以将 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, SCell配置在非 授权频谱的频段, 并将各个小区的载波配置信息发送给主 UE 和至少一个从 UE。 在载波配置完成后, eNB 需要确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
以主 UE和从 UE为例进行说明, 则 eNB可以分别向主 UE和从 UE下发 测量配置, 测量配置可以和配置载波使用同一个消息或者不同的消息发送给主 UE和从 UE。 主 UE和从 UE根据测量配置分别将测量得到的测量结果发送给 eNB, eNB根据测量结果确定非授权频谱是否处于可用状态以及主 UE和从 UE 之间能否采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输。
非授权频谱的可用状态至少包含两种情况,一种情况是非授权频谱处于空 闲状态, 未被其他无线接入系统占用; 一种情况是尽管其他无线接入系统占用 了非授权频段, 但距离 eNB和 /或 UE较远或者功率较低等情况, eNB与 UE 之间或主 UE与从 UE之间仍然可以使用非授权频谱正常通信且不对其他无线 接入系统造成严重干扰。
主 UE在确定非授权频谱处于可用状态且主 UE和从 UE之间可以采用 D2D通信模式传输数据后, 即可为从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。
第一, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则 接收 eNB 分配的非授权频谱资源池, 非授权频谱资源池包括处于可用状态的 非授权频谱, 将从非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作 为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的每一个从 UE均由 eNB提供服务, 则主 UE可以直接为该每一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源。具体地, eNB 可以确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱资源, 比如, eNB 确定频率区域是 5170-5190MHz的非授权频谱处于可用状态; eNB再在处于可用状态的非授权 频谱中确定非授权频谱资源池, 将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 比 如, 非授权频谱资源池是频率区域为 5170-5175MHZ的无线资源; 主 UE接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池,将所确定的非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授 权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源, 比如, 主 UE 在 5170-5175MHz中选取出 5170-5172MHz频率区域的 PRB作为供 UE使用的第 一无线资源。 用于 D2D通信的频率资源也可以是不连续的, 对于不同的 D2D
通信的主 UE可以选择 5170-5190MHz中不同频率区域的 PRB。
第二, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若目标设备是主 UE且从 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收向主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频谱资源池, 非授权频谱 资源池是 eNB与其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同占用的, 将从非授权频谱 资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 则 eNB在分配非授权频谱资源池时, 还需要与该其他 eNB进 行协商。 其中, eNB指为主 UE提供 PCell和非授权频谱上 SCell的 eNB, 其 他 eNB指至少使用非授权频谱的其他 eNB, eNB和其他 eNB可以相邻且提供 不同的小区, 比如, 第一 eNB和第二 eNB; 或, eNB和其他 eNB可以提供基 站间载波聚合的小区, 比如, 主 eNB和辅 eNB。
具体地, eNB通过诸如 X2接口之类的基站之间的接口将自身可以占用的 无线资源的信息添加到协商信息中发送给其他 eNB, 其他 eNB在协商信息所 指示的无线资源中确定该其他 eNB 可以占用的无线资源, 并将共同占用的无 线资源确定为非授权频谱资源池, 其他 eNB 再将确定的非授权频谱资源池通 知给 eNB。 eNB将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 主 UE将从非授权 频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的第一无线资源。 假设 eNB向主 UE提供服务, 其他 eNB向从 UE提供服务, 则 eNB将确定的 非授权频谱资源池分配给主 UE, 其他 eNB将确定的非授权频谱资源池分配给 从 UE, 主 UE在非授权频谱资源池中选取出第一无线资源, 根据第一无线资 源生成与从 UE对应的控制信令,将控制信令发送给从 UE,从 UE在接收到控 制信令之后在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式与主 UE进行数据传输。
需要说明的是,采用 D2D通信模式传输数据的主 UE和从 UE应该处于相 同的不连续接收 DRX状态,例如主 UE和从 UE均处于活动时间期间才能够传 输控制信令。
第三, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
对于每一次采用 D2D通信模式的数据传输,动态为 UE分配非授权频谱的 第一无线资源; 或,
根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 半静态分配策略是每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时对非授权频谱的第一无
线资源的分配策略。
本实施例中, 主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间可以采用 HARQ技术进行数据 传输, 则主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ新传输时动态为至少一个从 UE分配非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 对于数据的 HARQ 反馈可以通过非授权频谱的第五无线资源或授权频谱的第六无线资源进行反 馈, 第五无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈, 第六无线资源用于 在授权频谱上传输 HARQ反馈。 比如, 使用 PCell的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行 反馈或 SCell上的 PUCCH或 PUSCH进行反馈, 本实施例不作限定。
当 HARQ反馈指示某一次的新传输数据丟失了,则需要进行 HARQ重传。 主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ重传时动态为至少两个 UE分配非授权频谱的第一 无线资源, 分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述; 或, 主 UE可以在每一次 HARQ 重传时使用上一次 HARQ重传或 HARQ新传输时分配的第一无线资源。
本实施例中, 主 UE可以在每一次非授权频谱处于可用状态时根据预先配 置的半静态分配策略为至少一个从 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 无需 对每一次的 HARQ新传输动态分配第一无线资源。 其中, 根据半静态分配策 略分配第一无线资源的分配方式如上所述, 此处不赘述。 具体地, 主 UE可以 通过 RRC信令分别为每一个从 UE配置第一无线资源的周期, 再通过 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH分别向每一个从 UE发送半静态分配策略。 由于 SCell上的数据传 输仅在非授权频谱处于可用状态才进行, 因此, 周期仅仅在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时生效。
步骤 702, 根据分配的第一无线资源生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制 信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示信息;
为了使从 UE明确为从 UE分配的非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 主 UE需 要获取第一无线资源的指示信息, 并将指示信息添加到与从 UE对应的控制信 令中发送给从 UE。 其中, 指示信息用于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频 率区域发送或接收数据。 本发明中时隙指传输时间间隔 ΤΉ, 即一个调度时间 单位, 在 LTE中 1个 ΤΉ对应于一个子帧, 占用 lms的时间, 包括两个时槽。
由于采用 D2D通信模式传输数据时,从 UE在同一时刻只能执行接收操作 或发送操作, 因此, 主 UE还需要在控制信令中指示从 UE的操作类型。 比如, 当主 UE发送数据、 从 UE接收数据时, 与从 UE对应的控制信令用于指示从 UE某一个时隙从某一个频率区域接收数据。 或者预先配置主 UE在第一类时
隙发送数据, 从 UE在第一类时隙接收数据, 以及主 UE在第二类时隙接收数 据, 从 UE在第二类时隙发送数据, 其中第一类时隙和第二类时隙不同, 它们 共同组成全部时隙或部分时隙, 则主 UE和从 UE根据所预先配置的时隙位置 发送和接收数据, 就不用主 UE通过控制信令指示从 UE的操作类型。
步骤 703, 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无 线资源上采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;
主 UE将控制信令发送给从 UE之后, 从 UE即可根据控制信令中的指示 信息确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送或接收数据。
其中, 向 UE发送控制信令, 包括:
通过 eNB为 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向 UE发送控制信令;或, 通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 第三无线资源由控 制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 控制信令指示信息是 eNB在 eNB为 UE配 置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
为了保证从 UE能够正确接收到控制信令,以提高传输控制信令的可靠性, 主 UE可以通过授权频谱的第二无线资源向从 UE发送控制信令。本实施例中, 由于 PCell配置在授权频谱的频段, 因此, 主 UE可以通过 PCell上的 PDCCH 或 EPDCCH或 PUCCH向从 UE发送控制信令。 或,
为了进一步避免或减少主 UE对第二无线资源的占用, 以节省授权频谱上 的资源, 主 UE还可以在检测到非授权频谱处于可用状态且没有其他无线接入 系统在占用非授权频谱的无线资源时, 通过为从 UE分配的第三无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。此时, 为了使主 UE明确在哪一个时隙从哪 一个频率区域发送控制信令以及从 UE明确在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接 收控制信令, eNB 需要预先在授权频谱的第二无线资源上向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 并在授权频谱的第二无线资源上向从 UE发送 控制信令指示信息, 与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息用于指示主 UE在哪一 个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令, 与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息用 于指示从 UE在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令; 或, eNB可以对 主 UE发送控制信令的时隙和资源以及从 UE接收控制信令的时隙和资源进行 预先配置, 主 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域发送控制 信令,从 UE根据预先配置确定在哪一个时隙从哪一个频率区域接收控制信令。 其中, 第一无线资源用于在非授权频谱上传输数据, 第三无线资源用于在非授
权频谱上传输控制信令。
具体地, 通过第一无线资源向 UE发送控制信令, 包括:
当目标设备是发送控制信令的主 UE时,确定接收控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在第二无线资源上接收 eNB发送的控制信令指示信息, 再通过控制信令指示 信息确定的第三无线资源向从 UE发送控制信令, 以便从 UE在控制信令指示 信息确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
具体地, eNB可以预先在非授权频谱上为主 UE和至少一个从 UE分配发 送控制信令的第三无线资源, 并将用于指示该第三无线资源的指示信息分别添 加到与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息和与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息中, 通过第二无线资源向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息以及通过第 二无线资源向从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE在控制信 令指示信息所指示的第三无线资源上向每一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制 信令, 每一个从 UE根据接收到的控制信令指示信息确定接收控制信令的第三 无线资源, 并在确定的第三无线资源上接收控制信令。
步骤 704, 若目标设备是主 UE且 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则通 过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据; 若存在未接 收到数据的从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源上再次向从 UE发送所述数 据。
本实施例中, 当从 UE为一个时, 主 UE可以通过单播方式在第一无线资 源上向该从 UE发送数据, 实现采用 D2D通信模式传输数据。 或, 当从 UE至 少为一个时, 主 UE可以通过广播或组播方式在第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据, 从 UE对数据的接收状态进行反馈。 若存在未接收到数据的从 UE, 则主 UE确定不能通过第一无线资源向该从 UE发送数据, 则通过授权频 谱的第二无线资源再次向该从 UE发送数据。 或者, 主 UE也可以通过检测得 到的非授权频谱的信号质量确定从 UE是否接收到数据, 本实施例不限定对未 接收到数据的从 UE的确定方式。
需要补充说明的是, 主 UE采用何种方式向从 UE发送数据是由控制信令 确定的。 比如, 若控制信令的指示信息包括的是单个从 UE 的 C-RNTI 或 D2D-RNTI, 则指示主 UE通过单播方式在第一无线资源上向从 UE发送数据; 若控制信令的指示信息包括的是 Group RNTI,则指示主 UE通过广播或组播方 式在第一无线资源上向从 UE发送数据。
进一步地, eNB可以向主 UE发送与主 UE对应的控制信令指示信息且通 过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令指示信息, 主 UE通过广播或组播方式向至少一个从 UE发送与从 UE对应的控制信令。
需要补充说明的是, 本实施例提供的方法还包括:
每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的信号质量;
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则指示 UE采用 D2D 通信模式实现数据传输;
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 该小区通信模式是指 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
由于主 UE和至少一个从 UE能否在第一无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式传 输数据不仅依赖于非授权频谱资源是否处于可用状态,还依赖于非授权频谱的 信号质量, 因此, 为了避免非授权频谱的信号质量较差导致主 UE和至少一个 从 UE之间的通信效率不高的问题, eNB可以每隔预定时间检测非授权频谱的 信号质量或每隔预定时间指示主 UE或从 UE检测非授权频谱的信号质量。
若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件, 则主 UE确定继续采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据; 若检测结果为非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设 条件, 则主 UE确定采用小区通信模式传输数据, 即主 UE通过第二无线资源 将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再通过第二无线资源将接收到的数据转发给从 UE; 或者主 UE通过第二无线资源将数据发送给 eNB, eNB再进一步把数据发送到 核心网和应用服务器, 由应用服务器和核心网再通过 eNB或其他 eNB转发给 从 UE, 以实现主 UE和至少一个从 UE之间的数据传输。 其中, 预设条件可以 包括: 非授权频谱的不可用时长小于或等于第一阈值和非授权频谱的无线条件 低于门限值的时长小于或等于第二阈值中的至少一种。 当然, 还可以对预设条 件进行修改, 本实施例不对预设条件进行限定。
需要补充说明的是,若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至 少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务, 且主 UE动态分配第一无线资源或 eNB 根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 则控制信令需要在 eNB和其他 eNB 共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 且 eNB和其他 eNB各自使用第三无线资源给 主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令时所在的时隙相同, 频率可以不同, 以便每一个 从 UE在接收到控制信令后, 根据控制信令确定的时隙从第一无线资源上传输 数据。
若采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输的从 UE中存在至少一个从 UE由其他 eNB提供服务且主 UE根据半静态分配策略分配第一无线资源, 由于从 UE是 根据非授权频谱的可用时间确定数据传输的时隙的, 而不是控制信令, 因此, 控制信令可以在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送, 也可以不在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一无线资源时发送。 比如, eNB和其他 eNB可以 在不同无线帧的同一个子帧位置各自向主 UE和从 UE发送控制信令, 从而采 用 D2D通信模式传输数据的主 UE和从 UE在 eNB和其他 eNB共同占用第一 无线资源时可以使用第一无线资源进行数据传输。对于控制信令的上述两种发 送方式本实施例不作限定。
综上所述, 本发明实施例提供的设备通信方法, 通过在非授权频谱处于可 用状态时, 为 UE分配非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 根据分配的第一无线资源 生成与 UE对应的控制信令, 该控制信令携带有用于指示第一无线资源的指示 信息; 向 UE发送控制信令, 以便 UE在根据指示信息确定的第一无线资源上 采用 D2D通信模式实现数据传输, 可以在处于可用状态的非授权频谱的第一 无线资源上采用 D2D通信模式进行数据传输,而不需要额外为 UE分配授权频 谱上的无线资源, 解决了 eNB为 D2D通信模式中的 UE分配的无线资源难以 满足不断增长的频谱需求,导致采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率不高 的问题, 达到了提高采用 D2D通信模式的 UE之间的通信效率的效果。
另外, 通过在非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件时, 指示 UE采用小 区通信模式实现数据传输, 使得 UE在不能直接将数据发送给其他 UE时, 可 以将数据发送给 eNB, 由 eNB将接收到的数据转发给其他 UE, 实现了 UE之 间的数据传输。 需要说明的是: 上述实施例提供的设备通信装置在进行设备通信时, 仅以 上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明, 实际应用中, 可以根据需要而将上述功 能分配由不同的功能模块完成, 即将设备通信装置的内部结构划分成不同的功 能模块, 以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。 另外, 上述实施例提供的设备 通信装置与设备通信方法实施例属于同一构思, 其具体实现过程详见方法实施 例, 这里不再赘述。
上述本发明实施例序号仅仅为了描述, 不代表实施例的优劣。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到, 结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示
例的单元及算法步骤, 能够以电子硬件、 或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来 实现。 这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行, 取决于技术方案的特定应用 所描述的功能, 但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到, 为描述的方便和筒洁, 上述描述 的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程, 在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中, 应该理解到, 所揭露的系统、 装置和方 法, 可以通过其它的方式实现。 例如, 以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性 的, 例如, 所述单元的划分, 可以仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分, 实际实现时可以 有另外的划分方式, 例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系 统, 或一些特征可以忽略, 或不执行。 另一点, 所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦 合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口, 装置或单元的间接耦合或通信 连接, 可以是电性, 机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为 单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元, 即可以位于一个地方, 或者 也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部 单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外, 在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中, 也可以是各个单元单独物理存在, 也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元 中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用 时, 可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。 基于这样的理解, 本发明的技 术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以 以软件产品的形式体现出来, 该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中, 包括 若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机, 服务器, 或者网络设 备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。 而前述的存储介质 包括: U盘、 移动硬盘、 只读存储器(Read-Only Memory, ROM ), 随机存取 存储器(Random Access Memory, RAM ), 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序 代码的介质。
以上所述, 仅为本发明的具体实施方式, 但本发明的保护范围并不局限于
此, 任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内, 可轻易想到 变化或替换, 都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。 因此, 本发明的保护范围应 所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。
Claims
1、 一种设备通信装置, 其特征在于, 用于目标设备中, 所述装置包括: 资源分配模块,用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为用户设备 UE分配所 述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争 使用的频谱;
信令生成模块, 用于根据所述资源分配模块分配的所述第一无线资源生成 与所述 UE对应的控制信令,所述控制信令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源的 指示信息;
信令发送模块, 用于向所述 UE发送所述信令生成模块生成的所述控制信 令,以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的所述第一无线资源上采用设备到设 备 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述信令发送模块, 包括: 第一发送单元, 用于通过演进型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第 二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令; 或,
第二发送单元,用于通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控 制信令, 所述第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 所述控制信 令指示信息是 eNB在所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发 送。
3、 根据权利要求 2所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第二发送单元, 包括: 第一发送子单元, 用于当所述目标设备是 eNB时, 通过所述第二无线资源 向所述 UE发送所述控制信令指示信息,再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所 述第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在所述控制信令指 示信息确定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令;
第二发送子单元, 用于当所述目标设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时,确 定接收所述控制信令的 UE是从 UE,在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB发送 的所述控制信令指示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线 资源向所述从 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指示信息 确定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令。
4、 根据权利要求 1所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置还包括: 信号检测模块, 用于每隔预定时间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量; 第一通信模块, 用于在所述信号检测模块检测的结果为所述非授权频谱的 信号质量满足预设条件时,指示所述 UE采用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输; 第二通信模块, 用于在所述信号检测模块检测的结果为所述非授权频谱的 信号质量不满足预设条件时,指示所述 UE采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 所 述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB进行数据传输。
5、 根据权利要求 1所述的装置, 其特征在于, 若所述目标设备是主 UE且 所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述装置还包括:
数据传播模块, 用于所述信令发送模块向所述 UE发送所述控制信令之后, 通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据;
数据发送模块, 用于若存在未接收到所述数据传播模块传播的所述数据的 从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源上再次向所述从 UE发送所述数据。
6、 根据权利要求 1至 5任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述资源分配模 块, 包括:
第一分配单元,用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中不存在由其他 eNB 提供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的所述非授权频 谱中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源;
第二分配单元,用于若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频 谱资源池包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取 出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
7、 根据权利要求 1至 5任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述资源分配模 块, 包括:
第三分配单元, 用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由 其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商, 将协商得到的所 述 eNB和所述其他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述
第一无线资源;
第四分配单元,用于若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一个 由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非 授权频谱资源池,所述非授权频谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行分配 协商后确定共同占用的, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的 第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
8、 根据权利要求 1至 5任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述资源分配模 块, 包括:
第五分配单元, 用于对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态 为所述 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
第六分配单元,用于根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分配所述非 授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非授权频谱处于 可用状态时对所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
9、 一种设备通信装置, 其特征在于, 用于目标设备中, 所述装置包括: 处理器,用于在非授权频谱处于可用状态时, 为用户设备 UE分配所述非授 权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的 频谱;根据分配的所述第一无线资源生成与所述 UE对应的控制信令, 所述控制 信令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源的指示信息;
发射机, 用于向所述 UE发送所述处理器生成的所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的所述第一无线资源上采用设备到设备 D2D通信 模式实现数据传输。
10、 根据权利要求 9所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发射机, 具体用于通 过演进型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向所述 UE发送 所述控制信令; 或,通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信 令, 所述第三无线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 所述控制信令指 示信息是 eNB在所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
11、 根据权利要求 10所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理器, 具体用于当
所述目标设备是 eNB时, 通过所述第二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令 指示信息,再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所述 UE发 送所述控制信令,以便所述 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资 源上接收所述控制信令; 当所述目标设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时,确定 接收所述控制信令的 UE是从 UE,在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB发送的 所述控制信令指示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资 源向所述从 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确 定的所述第三无线资源上接收所述控制信令。
12、 根据权利要求 9所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理器, 还用于每隔 预定时间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量; 若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信 号质量满足预设条件, 则指示所述 UE采用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输; 若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件,则指示所述 UE采用 小区通信模式实现数据传输, 所述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB进行数 据传输。
13、根据权利要求 9所述的装置, 其特征在于, 若所述目标设备是主 UE且 所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述发射机, 还用于向所述 UE发送 所述控制信令之后, 通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据; 若存在未接收到所述数据的从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资 源上再次向所述从 UE发送所述数据。
14、 根据权利要求 9至 13任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理器, 具体用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE, 则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的所述非授权频谱中选取出 的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源; 若所述目标设备 是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE,则接收 eNB分配 的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池包括处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的 所述第一无线资源。
15、 根据权利要求 9至 13任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理器, 具体用于若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服 务的 UE, 则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商, 将协商得到的所述 eNB和所述其 他 eNB共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源; 若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的 从 UE, 则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非 授权频谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同占用的, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的 所述第一无线资源。
16、 根据权利要求 9至 13任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理器, 具体用于对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态为所述 UE分配 所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或, 根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非 授权频谱处于可用状态时对所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
17、 一种设备通信方法, 其特征在于, 用于目标设备中, 所述方法包括: 在非授权频谱处于可用状态时,为用户设备 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一 无线资源, 所述非授权频谱是指供各个无线接入系统竟争使用的频谱;
根据分配的所述第一无线资源生成与所述 UE对应的控制信令,所述控制信 令携带有用于指示所述第一无线资源的指示信息;
向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在根据所述指示信息确定的所 述第一无线资源上采用设备到设备 D2D通信模式实现数据传输。
18、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述向所述 UE发送所述 控制信令, 包括:
通过演进型基站 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源向所述 UE 发送所述控制信令; 或,
通过非授权频谱的第三无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令,所述第三无 线资源由控制信令指示信息或预先配置确定, 所述控制信令指示信息是 eNB在 所述 eNB为所述 UE配置的授权频谱的第二无线资源上发送。
19、 根据权利要求 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述通过所述第一无线资 源向所述 UE发送所述控制信令, 包括:
当所述目标设备是 eNB时, 通过所述第二无线资源向所述 UE发送所述控 制信令指示信息, 再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所 述 UE发送所述控制信令, 以便所述 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第 三无线资源上接收所述控制信令;
当所述目标设备是发送所述控制信令的主 UE时,确定接收所述控制信令的 UE是从 UE, 在所述第二无线资源上接收所述 eNB发送的所述控制信令指示信 息,再通过所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源向所述从 UE发送所 述控制信令,以便所述从 UE在所述控制信令指示信息确定的所述第三无线资源 上接收所述控制信令。
20、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包括: 每隔预定时间检测所述非授权频谱的信号质量;
若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量满足预设条件,则指示所述 UE采 用所述 D2D通信模式实现数据传输;
若检测结果为所述非授权频谱的信号质量不满足预设条件, 则指示所述 UE 采用小区通信模式实现数据传输, 所述小区通信模式是指所述 UE通过 eNB进 行数据传输。
21、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 若所述目标设备是主 UE 且所述 D2D通信模式为广播或组播方式, 则所述向所述 UE发送所述控制信令 之后, 还包括:
通过广播或组播方式在所述第一无线资源上向至少一个从 UE发送数据; 若存在未接收到所述数据的从 UE, 则在授权频谱的第四无线资源上再次向 所述从 UE发送所述数据。
22、 根据权利要求 17至 21任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述为用户 设备 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,
则确定处于可用状态的非授权频谱, 将所确定的所述非授权频谱中选取出的非 授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源;
若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中不存在由其他 eNB提供服务的从 UE, 则接收 eNB分配的非授权频谱资源池, 所述非授权频谱资源池包括处于可 用状态的非授权频谱, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第 一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源。
23、 根据权利要求 17至 21任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述为用户 设备 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
若所述目标设备是 eNB且所述 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服务的 UE,则与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商,将协商得到的所述 eNB和所述其他 eNB 共同占用的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分配的所述第一无线资源;
若所述目标设备是主 UE且所述从 UE中存在至少一个由其他 eNB提供服 务的从 UE, 则接收向所述主 UE提供服务的 eNB发送的非授权频谱资源池, 所 述非授权频谱资源池是所述 eNB与所述其他 eNB进行分配协商后确定共同占用 的, 将从所述非授权频谱资源池中选取出的非授权频谱的第一无线资源作为分 配的所述第一无线资源。
24、 根据权利要求 17至 21任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述为用户 设备 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无线资源, 包括:
对于每一次采用所述 D2D通信模式的数据传输, 动态为所述 UE分配所述 非授权频谱的第一无线资源; 或,
根据预先配置的半静态分配策略为所述 UE分配所述非授权频谱的第一无 线资源, 所述半静态分配策略是每一次所述非授权频谱处于可用状态时对所述 非授权频谱的第一无线资源的分配策略。
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201480000892.3A CN105103637B (zh) | 2014-01-26 | 2014-01-26 | 设备通信方法及装置 |
PCT/CN2014/071501 WO2015109573A1 (zh) | 2014-01-26 | 2014-01-26 | 设备通信方法及装置 |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2014/071501 WO2015109573A1 (zh) | 2014-01-26 | 2014-01-26 | 设备通信方法及装置 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2015109573A1 true WO2015109573A1 (zh) | 2015-07-30 |
Family
ID=53680675
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2014/071501 WO2015109573A1 (zh) | 2014-01-26 | 2014-01-26 | 设备通信方法及装置 |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN105103637B (zh) |
WO (1) | WO2015109573A1 (zh) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN106162900A (zh) * | 2016-08-15 | 2016-11-23 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 非授权频段上的d2d通信方法、d2d通信装置、终端和基站 |
WO2017148205A1 (zh) * | 2016-02-29 | 2017-09-08 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 数据传输方法及装置 |
WO2018076563A1 (zh) * | 2016-10-31 | 2018-05-03 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 用于d2d通信的资源配置方法及资源配置装置、基站和终端 |
CN110417528A (zh) * | 2016-04-14 | 2019-11-05 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | 一种d2d通信的方法和装置 |
Families Citing this family (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN110266451B (zh) * | 2018-03-12 | 2021-12-24 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | 一种被用于非授权频谱的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置 |
EP3860248A4 (en) * | 2018-09-28 | 2022-05-18 | Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. | CONTROL INSTRUCTION TRANSMISSION METHOD, BASE STATION, TERMINAL AND STORAGE MEDIA |
CN109548130A (zh) * | 2018-12-28 | 2019-03-29 | 浙江大学城市学院 | 基于免授权频段d2d系统的分布式节能方法 |
KR20210142732A (ko) | 2019-03-29 | 2021-11-25 | 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 | 경쟁 윈도우 크기(cws)의 결정 방법 및 관련 제품 |
CN110191504B (zh) * | 2019-04-16 | 2022-06-14 | 王聪语 | 一种功率控制方法 |
CN112261729B (zh) * | 2020-12-24 | 2021-03-19 | 北京建筑大学 | 一种基于d2d-u通信的自适应半分布式资源分配方法 |
WO2023075665A1 (en) * | 2021-10-29 | 2023-05-04 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | First user equipment, network node and methods for enabling sidelink in a wireless communication network |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2011144803A1 (en) * | 2010-05-19 | 2011-11-24 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing communication offloading to unlicensed bands |
CN103179575A (zh) * | 2011-12-23 | 2013-06-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 一种邻近设备通信的方法和系统、网络侧设备和用户设备 |
CN103222294A (zh) * | 2010-09-23 | 2013-07-24 | 诺基亚公司 | 混合蜂窝式和设备到设备网络中的自主未被许可波段重用 |
-
2014
- 2014-01-26 WO PCT/CN2014/071501 patent/WO2015109573A1/zh active Application Filing
- 2014-01-26 CN CN201480000892.3A patent/CN105103637B/zh active Active
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2011144803A1 (en) * | 2010-05-19 | 2011-11-24 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing communication offloading to unlicensed bands |
CN103222294A (zh) * | 2010-09-23 | 2013-07-24 | 诺基亚公司 | 混合蜂窝式和设备到设备网络中的自主未被许可波段重用 |
CN103179575A (zh) * | 2011-12-23 | 2013-06-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 一种邻近设备通信的方法和系统、网络侧设备和用户设备 |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2017148205A1 (zh) * | 2016-02-29 | 2017-09-08 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 数据传输方法及装置 |
CN110417528A (zh) * | 2016-04-14 | 2019-11-05 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | 一种d2d通信的方法和装置 |
CN110417528B (zh) * | 2016-04-14 | 2021-09-24 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | 一种d2d通信的方法和装置 |
CN106162900A (zh) * | 2016-08-15 | 2016-11-23 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 非授权频段上的d2d通信方法、d2d通信装置、终端和基站 |
WO2018032706A1 (zh) * | 2016-08-15 | 2018-02-22 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 非授权频段上的d2d通信方法、d2d通信装置、终端和基站 |
CN106162900B (zh) * | 2016-08-15 | 2020-03-17 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 非授权频段上的d2d通信方法、d2d通信装置、终端和基站 |
WO2018076563A1 (zh) * | 2016-10-31 | 2018-05-03 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | 用于d2d通信的资源配置方法及资源配置装置、基站和终端 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN105103637A (zh) | 2015-11-25 |
CN105103637B (zh) | 2019-07-23 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6891250B2 (ja) | デュアルpucchのためのタイミングアライメントプロシージャ | |
US11082857B2 (en) | Inter-carrier D2D resource allocation | |
JP7203117B2 (ja) | 協力し合う車両間における効率的なリソース使用のための方法 | |
US20210400704A1 (en) | In-coverage network controlled off-loading over an unlicensed sidelink | |
CN109644498B (zh) | 针对频谱共享的新无线电先听后讲设计 | |
CN110463324B (zh) | 针对无线设备的跨载波调度 | |
JP6591654B2 (ja) | スケジューリング要求とチャネル状態情報とを用いた低レイテンシ物理アップリンク制御チャネル | |
CN107079275B (zh) | 用于无线通信的方法和装备 | |
WO2019141101A1 (zh) | 随机接入方法及装置 | |
CN111295912B (zh) | 定向波束环境中的功率控制 | |
US10075940B2 (en) | Method for transmitting buffer status report in device-to-device communication, and device thereof | |
JP6001195B2 (ja) | ネットワークノード、およびアップリンクの無線リソースを割り当てる方法 | |
EP2939491B1 (en) | Method and user equipment for device-to-device communication | |
WO2015109573A1 (zh) | 设备通信方法及装置 | |
JP6197108B2 (ja) | 無線通信システムにおいて制御情報取得方法及び装置 | |
TW202005456A (zh) | 用於訊息及實體上行鏈路共享通道重複之信號機制 | |
US10342036B2 (en) | Secondary scheduling request | |
JP2018521590A (ja) | 共有無線周波数スペクトル帯域における増加された再使用係数のためのオーバージエアシグナリング | |
WO2015139392A1 (zh) | 设备到设备通信干扰避免方法和装置 | |
CN113475137A (zh) | 用于新无线电配置的上行链路(ul)的时间资源 | |
US20140029595A1 (en) | Communication system, mobile station device, base station device, random access processing method, and integrated circuit | |
WO2011018043A1 (zh) | 一种终端标识的使用方法、系统和设备 | |
WO2014101671A1 (zh) | 一种信息传输的方法、系统和设备 | |
JP2023506128A (ja) | 複数のアクティブグラント設定におけるタイマーハンドリング | |
KR20220045146A (ko) | 사이드링크 전력 제어 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 201480000892.3 Country of ref document: CN |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 14880264 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 14880264 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |